US5188927A - Composition and process for the processing of silver halide color photographic material - Google Patents

Composition and process for the processing of silver halide color photographic material Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US5188927A
US5188927A US07/715,282 US71528291A US5188927A US 5188927 A US5188927 A US 5188927A US 71528291 A US71528291 A US 71528291A US 5188927 A US5188927 A US 5188927A
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
group
processing
silver halide
mol
general formula
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Lifetime
Application number
US07/715,282
Inventor
Hisashi Okada
Seki Hiroyuki
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Fujifilm Holdings Corp
Fujifilm Corp
Original Assignee
Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP25853990A external-priority patent/JPH04134450A/en
Priority claimed from JP33077690A external-priority patent/JP2670902B2/en
Application filed by Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd filed Critical Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd
Assigned to FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD. reassignment FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST. Assignors: OKADA, HISASHI, SEKI, HIROYUKI
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of US5188927A publication Critical patent/US5188927A/en
Assigned to FUJIFILM CORPORATION reassignment FUJIFILM CORPORATION ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: FUJIFILM HOLDINGS CORPORATION (FORMERLY FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.)
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Lifetime legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03C—PHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C7/00—Multicolour photographic processes or agents therefor; Regeneration of such processing agents; Photosensitive materials for multicolour processes
    • G03C7/30—Colour processes using colour-coupling substances; Materials therefor; Preparing or processing such materials
    • G03C7/407—Development processes or agents therefor
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03C—PHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C7/00—Multicolour photographic processes or agents therefor; Regeneration of such processing agents; Photosensitive materials for multicolour processes
    • G03C7/30—Colour processes using colour-coupling substances; Materials therefor; Preparing or processing such materials
    • G03C7/42—Bleach-fixing or agents therefor ; Desilvering processes

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a composition for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material. More particularly, the present invention relates to a processing composition containing a novel bleaching agent for use in the bleaching step after color development and a process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material with said processing composition.
  • a silver halide color photographic material (hereinafter referred to as a "color light-sensitive material”) is essentially imagewise exposed to light, and then subjected to color development and desilvering.
  • developed silver produced at the development step is oxidized (bleached) with a bleaching agent having an oxidizing power to a silver salt which is then removed from the light-sensitive layer together with unused silver halide grains by a fixing agent which renders these silver salts and silver halide soluble (fixing).
  • Bleaching and fixing may be effected separately as bleaching step and fixing step, or together as a blix step.
  • auxiliary steps may be added to these essential processing steps.
  • auxiliary steps include a rinse (with water) step, a stabilizing step, a film hardening step, and a stop step.
  • red prussiate As bleaching agents which can attain rapid bleach there have been known red prussiate, iron chloride, bromate, etc.
  • red prussiate cannot be widely used due to problem of environmental protection.
  • Iron chloride cannot be widely used due to the inconvenience of difficult handling due to metallic corrosion.
  • Bromates cannot be widely used due to the solution instability.
  • ferric complexes of 1,3-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid have been disclosed as bleaching agents which can meet these requirements.
  • bleaching agents have some disadvantages.
  • One of these disadvantages is that these bleaching agents cause bleach fogging accompanied by bleach.
  • As a process for eliminating bleach fogging there has been proposed a process which comprises the addition of a buffer to the bleaching solution (disclosed, for example, in JP-A-1-213657).
  • JP-A as used herein means an "unexamined published Japanese patent application”.
  • this improvement leaves much to be desired.
  • heavier bleach fogging can be caused due to the use of a highly active developer.
  • a processing solution having a bleaching capacity comprising a ferric complex of 1,3-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid causes an increase in stain during storage of the photographic material after processing.
  • Another problem is that the use of a bleaching solution comprising a ferric complex of 1,3-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid causes an intensification of magenta dye on the dye image portion which leads to a change in gradation during storage after processing.
  • a further problem is that when a shorter bleaching time is used, even though a bleaching solution comprising a ferric complex of 1,3-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid is used, since cyan dye on the image portion tends to become a leuco dye, the recovery to the original color is inhibited.
  • the present invention provides a composition for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material, which comprises at least one metal chelate compound formed of a salt of metal selected from the group consisting of Fe(III), Mn(III), Co(III), Rh(II), Rh(III), Au(III), Au(II) and Ce(IV) and a compound represented by the general formula (I): ##STR2## wherein R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R a , R b , and R c each represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group or an aromatic group; R 5 and R 6 each represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an acyl group a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonyl group or a
  • the present invention further provides a processing method of a silver halide color photographic material using the composition.
  • a silver halide color photographic material which has been imagewise exposed to light and color-developed can be processed with a processing composition containing at least a compound of the present invention to effect the bleaching of developed silver at an extremely high rate with no remarkable bleach fogging which has been caused by the prior art bleaching agent which can provide a rapid bleach.
  • This effect can be attained more remarkably when the rapid processing in 3 minutes or less is followed by the processing with a processing composition of the present invention.
  • the composition of the present invention can also provide an excellent image preservability after processing and easy handling.
  • the processing composition of the present invention contains an organic acid, the recovery to the original color cannot be worsened, in addition to these effects. This effect can be attained more remarkably when the bleaching step is expedited.
  • the effects of the present invention can be attained remarkably. That is, an excellent image preservability after processing can be provided. An easy handling can also be provided.
  • an aliphatic group includes a straight-chain, branched or cyclic alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group, preferably containing 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • a preferred example of such an aliphatic group is an alkyl group, particularly C 1-4 alkyl group.
  • an aromatic group includes a monocyclic or bicyclic aryl group such as a phenyl group and a naphthyl group, preferably a phenyl group.
  • a group having an acyl moiety includes those having an aliphatic and aromatic acyl moiety; a sulfonyl group or a sulfinyl group is a group connected to an aliphatic group or an aromatic group; and sulfamoyl group and a carbamoyl group include unsubstituted groups thereof and aliphatic and aromatic sulfamoyl and carbamoyl groups.
  • the acyl group, sulfamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, sulfonyl group or sulfinyl group represented by R 5 or R 6 preferably contains 10 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 5 and R 6 do not form a ring
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 each is preferably a hydrogen atom
  • R 5 and R 6 each is preferably in the cis-position.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R a , R b and R c may contain substituents.
  • substituents include an alkyl group (C 1-6 : e.g., methyl and ethyl), an aralkyl group (C 7-11 ; e.g., phenylmethyl), an alkenyl group (C 3-6 : e.g., allyl), an alkinyl group (C 2-6 ), an alkoxy group (C 1-6 : e.g., methoxy and ethoxy), an aryl group (C 6-13 : e.g., phenyl and p-methylphenyl), an unsubstituted amino group, an aliphatic or aromatic amino group (C 1-12 : e.g., dimethyl amino), an acylamino group (C 2-13 e.g., acetylamino), a sul
  • substituents to be contained in R a , R b and R c include carboxyl group, phosphono group, sulfo group, and hydroxyl group, more preferably carboxyl group and hydroxyl group, particularly carboxyl group.
  • the hydrogen atom in acidic groups herein may be substituted with an alkali metal atom such as Na and K.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R a , R b , R c , and L 1 may be connected to each other to form a ring.
  • L 1 represents an aliphatic group, aromatic group or a divalent linking group containing at least one of them.
  • a divalent linking group include an alkylene group (preferably C 1-10 alkylene group), an arylane group (preferably C 6-10 arylene group), an aralkylene group (preferably C 7-10 aralkylene group), --O--, --S--, ##STR3## (in which R 0 is a hydrogen atom, aliphatic group, aromatic group or hydroxyl group , --SO 2 --, and group formed of a combination of alkylene group and arylene group. A combination of these groups may be used.
  • These divalent linking groups may have substituents. Examples of such substituents include those described with reference to R 1 .
  • L 1 may be preferably represented by the general formula (L 1 ): ##STR4## wherein L a and L b each represents an alkylene group, an aralkylene group or an arylene group; and A represents --O--, --S--, ##STR5## (in which R 01 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or hydroxyl group), --SO 2 -- or a group formed of a combination thereof.
  • L 1 is preferably a group represented by the general formula (L 1 ) wherein n and m each represents 0, more preferably methylene group or ethylene group.
  • a 1 represents a carboxyl group, phosphono group, sulfo group or hydroxyl group.
  • a 1 is preferably a carboxyl group or hydroxyl group, more preferably a carboxyl group.
  • the hydrogen atom of the acidic groups herein may be substituted with an alkali metal atom such as sodium and potassium metal atom.
  • t and u in general formula (I) each represents an integer 0 or 1. At least one of t and u is preferably 1. In particular, t and u both preferably represent an integer of 1.
  • chelate compounds represented by the general formula (II) may be preferably used.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R b , R c , A 1 , L 1 , t and u are as defined in the general formula (I);
  • L 2 has the same meaning as L 1 in the general formula (I);
  • a 2 has the same meaaning as A 1 in the general formula (I), and
  • R 5 ' and R 6 ' has the same meaning as R 5 and R 6 with the proviso that R 5 ' and R 6 ' are not connected to each other to form a ring.
  • Preferred among the groups represented by the general formula (II) is one represented by the general formula (III): ##STR8## wherein R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 ', R 6 ', A 1 , A 2 , L 1 , L 2 , t and u are as defined in the general formula (II); L 3 and L 4 each has the same meaning as L 1 in the general formula (I); and A 3 and A 4 each has the same meaaning as A 1 in the general formula (I).
  • Examples of the 5- or 6-membered ring represented by ##STR10## include aromatic ring (e.g., benzene, naphthalene, phenanthrene, anthracene), heterocyclic group preferably containing at least one of N, O and S atoms as a hetro atom (e.g., pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, thiophene, furane, pyran, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isooxazole, thianthrene, isobenzofurane, chromene, xanthene, phenoxathiin, indolidine, isoindole, indole, imidazole, quinolidine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pterin
  • Preferred among the rings represented by ##STR11## are benzene, naphthalene, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, quinoline, and quinoxaline. Particularly preferred among these rings is benzene.
  • the ring represented by ##STR12## may contain at least one substituent disclosed for R 1 .
  • L 1 is preferably a C 1-4 alkylene group, C 6-12 arylene group or a group containing a combination thereof, more preferably methylene group or ethylene group, particularly methylene group.
  • a 1 represents a carboxyl group, phosphono group, sulfo group or hydroxyl group.
  • the hydrogen atom in the acidic group represented by A 1 may be substituted with an alkali metal atom such as Na and K.
  • a 1 is preferably a carboxyl or hydroxyl group, particularly carboxyl group.
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 13 and R 14 may be the same or different and each independently represents a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group (preferably an alkyl group). The total carbon number of these groups is preferably 1 to 13.
  • the alkyl groups represented by R 11 to R 14 may be substituted by substituents as set forth with reference to R 1 .
  • R 11 , R 12 R 13 and R 14 each is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • Ra, Rb and Rc may be the same or different and each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (preferably an alkyl group) or an aromatic group (preferably an aryl group).
  • the alkyl group represented by Ra, Rb or Rc may be straight-chain, branched or cyclic and preferably contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Preferred examples of such an alkyl group include methyl group and ethyl group.
  • the aryl group represented by Ra, Rb or Rc preferably contains 6 to 10 carbon atoms and is more preferably a phenyl group.
  • the alkyl or aryl group represented by Ra, Rb or Rc may be substituted by substituents as set forth with reference to R 1 .
  • substituents include a carboxyl group, a phosphono group, a sulfo group, a hydroxyl group and substituted groups thereof (acidic group only) with an alkali metal atom (e.g., Na and K). More preferred among these substituents are carboxyl group and hydroxyl group. Particularly preferred among these substituents is carboxyl group.
  • Ra, Rb and Rc may be connected to each other to form a ring (R a and R b or R a and R c ).
  • t and u each represents an integer 0 or 1. At least one of t and u is preferably 1. Particularly, t and u both represents 1.
  • the compound which can be more preferably used in the present invention is a compound represented by the general formula (V): ##STR13## wherein Z, A 1 , L 1 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R b , R c , t, and u are as defined in the general formula (IV); L 2 has the same meaning as L 1 in the general formula (IV); and A 2 has the same meaning as A 1 in the general formula (IV).
  • More preferred compounds are those represented by the general formula (VI): ##STR14## wherein Z, A 1 , L 1 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , t, and u are as defined in the general formula (IV); L 2 , L 3 and L 4 each has the same meaning as L 1 in the general formula (IV); and A 2 , A 3 and A 4 has the same meaning as A 1 in the general formula (IV).
  • Metal salts which constitute the metal chelate compound of the present invention are selected from the group consisting of salts of Fe(III), Mn(III), Co(III), Rh(II), Rh(III), Au(II), Au(III) and Ce(IV). Preferred among these metals are Fe(III), Mn(III), and Ce(IV). Particularly preferred among these metals is Fe(III).
  • Anions or cations which form these metal salts are preferably SO 4 -- , Cl - , NO 3 - , NH 4 + or PO 4 - . It is preferable that an ion(s) is selected so that it form a water soluble chelate compound.
  • metal chelate compound for use in the present invention may be isolated as metal chelate compound.
  • the chelate compound is not necessary to be isolated. In practical use, it is convenient from the point of view of easy handling, to directly use a chelate forming reaction product of the compound represented by general formula (I) and the metal salt.
  • Two or more kinds of metal chelate compounds of the present invention can be used in combination.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (I) and the above mentioned metal salt such as ferric sulfate, ferric chloride, ferric nitrate, ferric ammonium sulfate and ferric phosphate can be reacted with each other in a solution in the present invention.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (I) may be used in a molar ratio of 1.0 or more based on metal ion. If the stability of the metal chelate compound is low, this ratio is preferably high. In general, this ratio is in the range of 1 to 30.
  • a preferred concentration of the metal ion is 0.05 to 1 mol/l.
  • the reaction temperature is preferably 5° to 80° C. and more preferably 15° to 45° C.
  • the metal chelate compound of the present invention may be incorporated in the fixing solution or an interbath (e.g., bleach acceleration bath) provided between color development process and desilvering process in a small amount.
  • the metal chelate compound of the present invention can be incorporated in the bleaching solution or blix solution in an amount of 0.05 to 1 mol/l to effectively serve as a bleaching agent.
  • processing solution having a bleaching power (general term for bleaching solution or blix solution) will be described hereinafter.
  • the metal chelate compound of the present invention can be incorporated in the processing solution having a bleaching capacity in an amount of 0.05 to 1 mol/l to effectively serve as bleaching agent. More preferably, the metal chelate compound of the present invention can be incorporated in the processing solution having a bleaching power in an amount of 0.1 to 0.5 mol/l.
  • the processing solution having a bleaching power may preferably contain an organic acid in addition to the above mentioned metal chelate compound.
  • the acid is preferably used for controlling the pH of the processing solution.
  • Preferred examples of the organic acid to be used in the present invention include a monobasic acid such as formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, monochloroacetic acid, monobromoacetic acid, monochloropropionic acid, lactic acid, pyruvic acid, acrylic acid, butyric acid, isobutyric acid, pivalic acid, aminoacetic acid, valeric acid, isovaleric acid, benzoic acid, chloro and hydroxy mono-substituted benzoic acid, and nicotinic acid, amino acid compound such as asparagine, aspartic acid, alanine, arginine, ethionine, glycine, glutamine, cystein, serine, methionine, and leucine, dibasic acid such as oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, tartaric acid, malic acid, oxaloacetic acid, phthalic acid, isophthalic acid,
  • organic acids those having a pKa value of 1.5 to 6.5 may be preferably used. More preferably, organic acids with a pKa value of 2.0 to 5.5 and containing carboxyl group may be used. Particularly preferred among these organic acids are monobasic acids. Most preferred among these monobasic acids are acetic acid and/or glycolic acid.
  • the amount of such an organic acid to be used is preferably 0 to 3.0 mol, more preferably 0.05 or more and not more than to 2.0 mol per l of processing solution having a bleaching power or its replenisher.
  • organic acids Two or more of these organic acids may be used in admixture. In stead of these organic acids, their salts may be used in combination with inorganic acids.
  • the metal chelate compound of the present invention When used as bleaching agent to be incorporated in the processing solution having a bleaching capacity, it may be used in combination with other bleaching agents so far as the effects of the present invention can be attained.
  • the amount of the other bleaching agent is preferably 1/10 to 10 mol per mol of the metal chelate compound.
  • bleaching agents include bleaching agents of Fe(III), Co(III) or Mn(III) chelates of the compounds set forth below, peroxodisulfate, hydrogen peroxide, and bromate.
  • Examples of compounds which constitute the above mentioned chelate bleaching agents include ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate, diammonium ethylenediaminetetraacetate, tetra(trimethylammonium) ethylenediaminetetraacetate, tetrapotassium ethylenediaminetetraacetate, tetrasodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate, trisodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, pentasodium diethylenetriaminepentaacetate, ethylenediamine-N-( ⁇ -oxyethyl)-N,N',N'-triacetic acid, trisodium ethylenediamine-N-( ⁇ -oxyethyl)-N,N',N'-triacetate, triammonium ethylenediamine-N-( ⁇ -oxyethyl)-N,N',N'-triacetate
  • the processing solution having a bleaching power containing the present metal chelate compound may preferably comprise a halide such as chloride, bromide or iodide as a rehalogenating agent for accelerating oxidation of silver in addition to the metal chelate compound and the above mentioned organic acid.
  • a halide such as chloride, bromide or iodide
  • the amount of the rehalogenating agent is generally in the range of 0.01 to 2.0 mol/l.
  • an organic ligand which forms a difficultly soluble silver salt may be incorporated in the processing solution.
  • the halide may be incorporated in the processing solution in the form of an alkaline metal salt, ammonium salt, guanidine salt or amine salt.
  • salts include sodium bromide, ammonium bromide, potassium chloride, and guanidine chloride. Preferred among these salts is ammonium bromide.
  • the amount of the rehalogenating agent to be incorporated in the bleaching solution is in the range of 0.1 to 2.0 ml/l, preferably 0.3 to 1.5 mol/l.
  • the blix solution containing the present metal chelate compound or the metal an organic acid may comprise a fixing agent as described later and optionally the above mentioned rehalogenating agent, in addition to the metal chelate compound.
  • the amount of the rehalogenating agent to be incorporated in the blix solution is in the range of 0.001 to 2.0 mol/l, preferably 0.01 to 1.0 mol/l.
  • the bleaching solution or blix solution of the present invention may further comprise a bleach accelerator, a corrosion inhibitor for inhibiting the corrosion of the processing bath, a buffer for maintaining the processing solution at a desired pH range, a fluorescent brightening agent, an antifoaming agent or the like if desired.
  • a bleach accelerator there can be used a compound containing a mercapto group or disulfide group as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,893,858 and 1,138,842, German Patent 1,290,812, JP-A-53-95630 (the term "JP-A” as used herein means an "unexamined published Japanese patent application"), and Research Disclosure No. 17129 (1978), the thiazoline derivative as disclosed in JP-A-50-140129, the thiourea derivatives as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
  • nitrate such as ammonium nitrate and potassium nitrate.
  • the amount of the nitrate to be incorporated in the processing solution is in the range of 0.05 to 0.5 mol/l, preferably 0.01 to 2.0 mol/l, more preferably 0.05 to 0.5 mol/l.
  • the pH value of the bleaching solution or blix solution of the present invention is in the range of 2.0 to 8.0, preferably 3.0 to 7.5. If the color development step is immediately followed by bleach or blix step, the processing solution is preferably used at a pH range of 6.0 or less, more preferably 5.5 or less, in order to inhibit bleach fogging. If the pH value of the processing solution falls below 2.0, the metal chelate according to the present invention becomes unstable. Therefore, the pH value of the processing solution is preferably in the range of 2.0 to 5.5.
  • the above mentioned organic acid can be used in combination with an alkaline agent (e.g., aqueous ammonia, KOH, NaOH, imidazole, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine).
  • an alkaline agent e.g., aqueous ammonia, KOH, NaOH, imidazole, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine.
  • alkaline agents e.g., aqueous ammonia, KOH, NaOH, imidazole, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine.
  • the processing solution containing complex salt of iron (III) and having a bleaching power which has been used is preferably aerated to oxidize the resulting ferrous complex. This regenerates the bleaching agent, keeping the photographic properties extremely stable.
  • the bleach or blix step may be effected generally at a temperature of 30° to 50° C., preferably 35° to 45° C.
  • the bleaching or blix time generally ranges from 10 seconds to 5 minutes, preferably from 10 seconds to 60 seconds, more preferably from 10 seconds to 30 seconds.
  • the bleaching time generally ranges from 5 seconds to 70 seconds, preferably 5 seconds to 50 seconds, more preferably 5 seconds to 30 seconds, and particularly preferably 5 seconds to 15 seconds. Under these preferred processing conditions, excellent results, for example, rapid processing and no increase in stain can be provided.
  • the fixing solution or blix solution may comprise a fixing agent.
  • a fixing agent include a thiosulfate, a thiocyanate, a thioether, an amine, a mercapto, a thione, a thiourea, and an iodide.
  • Specific examples of these compounds include ammonium thiosulfate, sodium thiosulfate, potassium thiosulfate, guanidine thiosulfate, potassium thiocyanate, dihydroxyethyl-thioether, 3,6-dithia-1,8-octanediol, and imidazole.
  • thiosulfate especially ammonium thiosulfate may be preferably used for rapid fixing.
  • two or more kinds of fixing agents can be used in combination for rapid fixing.
  • ammonium thiosulfate may be preferably used in combination with ammonium thiocyanate, imidazole, thiourea, thioether or the like.
  • the secondary fixing agent may be used generally in an amount of 0.01 to 100 mol % based on ammonium thiosulfate.
  • the amount of the fixing agent to be incorporated in the fixing solution or blix solution is generally in the range of 0.1 to 3.0 mol/l, preferably 0.5 to 2.0 mol/l.
  • the pH value of the fixing solution depends on the kind of the fixing agent contained therein and is normally in the range of 3.0 to 9.0. In particular, if a thiosulfate is used, the pH value of the fixing solution is preferably in the range of 6.5 to 8.0 for stable fixing properties.
  • the fixing solution and/or blix solution may comprise a preservative to enhance the aging stability thereof.
  • the fixing solution or blix solution containing a thiosulfate may effectively comprise a sulfite and/or hydroxylamine, hydrazine or aldehyde-bisulfite adduct (e.g., acetaldehyde-bisulfite adduct, particularly aromatic aldehyde-bisulfite adduct as described in JP-A-1-298935) as a preservative.
  • aldehyde-bisulfite adduct e.g., acetaldehyde-bisulfite adduct, particularly aromatic aldehyde-bisulfite adduct as described in JP-A-1-298935
  • sulfinic compounds as described in JP-A-62-143048 may be preferably used.
  • the fixing solution and/or blix solution may preferably comprise a buffer to keep the pH value thereof constant.
  • a buffer include a phosphate, an imidazole such as imidazole, 1-methylimidazole, 2-methylimidazole, and 1-ethylimidazole, triethanolamine, N-allylmorpholine, and N-benzoylpiperadine.
  • the fixing solution may comprise various chelating agents to opacify iron ions brought by the bleaching solution to improve the stability thereof.
  • Preferred examples of such chelating agents include 1-hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphonic acid, ethylenediamine-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenephosphonic acid, nitrilotrimethylenephosphonic acid, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, cyclohexanediaminetetraacetic acid, and 1,2-propanediaminetetraacetic acid.
  • the fixing step may be effected generally at a temperature of 30° to 50° C., preferably 35° to 45° C.
  • the fixing time generally ranges from 35 seconds to 2 minutes, preferably from 40 seconds to 100 seconds.
  • the fixing time ranges from 10 seconds to 70 secons, preferably 10 seconds to 30 seconds.
  • the desilvering step may consist of a bleach step and/or blix step in combination.
  • Typical examples of such a combination include:
  • Light-sensitive materials for picture taking may be preferably subjected to the combination i, ii, iii, or iv, more preferably i, ii or iii.
  • Light-sensitive material for print may be preferably subjected to the combination v.
  • the present invention can be applied to any desilvering step which is effected after color development through the stop step, the rinse step or the like.
  • the agitation is preferably intensified as much as possible to more effectively accomplish the effects of the present invention.
  • the agitation can be intensified by various methods.
  • the processing solution may be jetted to the surface of the emulsion layer of the light-sensitive material as described in JP-A-62-183460 and 62-183461.
  • the agitating effect can be improved by a rotary means as described in JP-A-62-183461.
  • the agitating effect can be improved by moving the light-sensitive material with the emulsion surface in contact with a wiper blade provided in the bath so that a turbulence occurs on the emulsion surface.
  • the agitation can be intensified by increasing the total circulated amount of processing solution.
  • Such an agitation improving method can be effectively applied to the bleaching bath, blix bath or fixing bath.
  • the improvement in agitation effect expedites the supply of a bleaching agent, fixing agent or the like into the emulsion film, resulting in an improvement in desilvering rate.
  • the above mentioned agitation improving method is more effective when a bleach accelerator is used.
  • the agitation improving method can remarkably enhance the bleach accelerating effect or eliminate the effect of inhibiting fixation by the bleach accelerator.
  • the above mentioned strong agitation may be used in the color development, rinse with water or stabilization.
  • the color developer used in the present color development may comprise a known aromatic primary amine color developing agent.
  • Preferred examples of such an aromatic primary amine color developing agent include p-phenylenediamine derivatives. Specific examples of such p-phenylenediamine derivatives will be set forth below, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
  • p-phenylenediamine derivatives may be used in the form of salt such as a sulfate, a hydrochloride, a sulfite and a p-toluenesulfonate.
  • the amount of the aromatic primary amine color developing agent to be used is generally in the range of 0.0002 to 0.2 mol, more preferably about 0.001 to 0.1 mol, more preferably 0.01 to 0.06 per l of color developer.
  • the color developer may comprise as preservative a sulfite such as sodium sulfite, potassium sulfite, sodium bisulfite, potassium bisulfite, sodium metasulfite and potassium metasulfite or a carbonyl-sulfurous acid addition product.
  • a sulfite such as sodium sulfite, potassium sulfite, sodium bisulfite, potassium bisulfite, sodium metasulfite and potassium metasulfite or a carbonyl-sulfurous acid addition product.
  • the color developer may preferably comprise as a compound for directly preserving the aromatic primary amine color developing agent various hydroxylamines as disclosed in JP-A-63-5341 and 63-106655, preferably those containing sulfo group or carboxyl group, hydroxamic acids as described in JP-A-63-43138, hydrazines and hydrazides as described in JP-A-63-146041, phenols as described in JP-A-63-44657 and 63-58443, ⁇ -hydroxyketones and ⁇ -aminoketones as described in JP-A-63-44656, and/or various saccharides as described in JP-A-63-36244.
  • various hydroxylamines as disclosed in JP-A-63-5341 and 63-106655, preferably those containing sulfo group or carboxyl group, hydroxamic acids as described in JP-A-63-43138, hydrazines and hydrazides as described in
  • These compounds may be preferably used in combination with monoamines as described in JP-A-63-4235, JP-A-63-24254, JP-A-63-21647, JP-A-63-146040, JP-A-63-27841, and JP-A-63-25654, diamines as described in JP-A-63-30845, 63-14640, and 63-43139, polyamines as described in JP-A-63-21647, and 63-26655, polyamines as described in JP-A-63-44655, nitroxy radicals as described in JP-A-63-53551, alcohols as described in JP-A-63-43140 and JP-A-63-53549, oxims as described in JP-A-63-56654, and tertiary amines as described in JP-A-63-239447.
  • preservatives which can be incorporated in the color developer if desired include various metals as described in JP-A-57-44148 and 57-3749, salicylic acids as described in JP-A-59-180588, alkanolamines as described in JP-A-54-3582, polyethyleneimines as described in JP-A-56-94349, and aromatic polyhydroxy compounds as described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,746,544. In particular, aromatic polyhydroxy compounds may be preferably used.
  • the amount of such a preservative to be incorporated in the color developer is generally in the range of 0.005 to 0.2 mol/l, preferably 0.01 to 0.05 mol/l.
  • the color developer to be used in the present invention preferably has a pH value of 9 to 12, more preferably 9.5 to 11.5.
  • the color developer may further comprise compounds which have been known to constitute color developers.
  • various buffers may be preferably used.
  • buffers include sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, trisodium phosphate, tripotassium phosphate, disodium phosphate, dipotassium phosphate, sodium borate, potassium borate, sodium terraborate (borax), potassium tetraborate, sodium o-hydroxybenzoate (sodium salicylate), potassium o-hydroxybenzoate, sodium 5-sulfo-2-hydroxybenzoate (sodium 5-sulfosalicylate), and potassium 5-sulfo-2-hydroxybenzoate (potassium 5-sulfosalicylate).
  • the present invention should not be construed as being limited to these compounds.
  • the amount of the buffer to be incorporated in the color developer is preferably in the range of 0.1 mol/l or more, particularly 0.1 to 0.4 mol/l.
  • the color developer may further comprise various chelating agents as a precipitation inhibiting agent for calcium or magnesium or to improve the stability of the color developer.
  • organic acid compounds examples include aminopolycarboxylic acids, organic phosphonic acids, and phosphonocarboxylic acids.
  • organic acid compounds include nitrilotriacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, N,N,N-trimethylenephosphonic acid, ethylenediamine-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenephosphonic acid, transcyclohexanediaminetetraacetic acid, 1,2-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid, hydroxyethyliminodiacetic acid, glycoletherdiaminetetraacetic acid, ethylenediamineorthohydroxyphenylacetic acid, 2-phosphonobutane-1,2,4-tricarboxylic acid, 1-hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphonic acid, and N,N'-bis(2-hydroxybenzyl)ethylenediamine-
  • Two or more such chelating agents can be used in combination if desired.
  • a chelating agent to be incorporated in the color developer is such that it suffices to block metallic ions in the color developer, e.g., 0.001 to 0.05 mol/l, preferably 0.003 to 0.02 mol/l.
  • the color developer may optionally comprise any development accelerators.
  • Examples of development accelerators which can be incorporated in the color developer include thioether compounds as disclosed in JP-B-37-16088, JP-B-37-5987, JP-B-38-7826, JP-B-44-12380, and JP-B-45-9019, and U.S. Pat. No. 3,818,247, p-phenylenediamine compounds as disclosed in JP-A-52-49829 and JP-A-50-15554, quaternary ammonium salts as disclosed in JP-A-50-137726, JP-A-56-156826 and JP-A-52-43429, and JP-B-44-30074, amine compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • auxiliary developing agents there can be used 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidones for rapid development.
  • auxiliary developing agents include compounds as set forth below: ##STR21##
  • the amount of such an auxiliary developing agent to be incorporated in the color developer is normally in the range of 0.0005 to 0.03 mol/l, preferably 0.001 to 0.01 mol/l.
  • the color developer to be used in the present invention can comprise any fog inhibitors as necessary.
  • fog inhibitors there can be used a halide of alkaline metal such as sodium chloride, potassium bromide and potassium iodide or organic fog inhibitor.
  • organic fog inhibitor include nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds such as benzotriazole, 6-nitrobenzimidazole, 5-nitroisoindazole, 5-methylbenzotriazole, 5-nitrobenzotriazole, 5-chlorobenzotriazole, 2-thiazolylbenzimidazole, 2-thiazolylmethylbenzimidazole, indazole, hydroxyazaindolidine, and adenine.
  • the color developer to be used in the present invention may comprise a fluorescent brightening agent.
  • a fluorescent brightening agent there can be preferably used 4,4'-diamino-2,2'-disulfostilbene compound.
  • the amount of such a fluorescent brightening agent to be incorporated in the color developer is generally in the range of 0 to 5 g/l, preferably 0.1 to 4 g/l.
  • the color developer to be used in the present invention may comprise various surface active agents such as alkylsulfonic acid, arylsulfonic acid, aliphatic carboxylic acid and aromatic carboxylic acid if desired.
  • the temperature at which the present processing is effected with the color developer is generally in the range of 20° to 55° C., preferably 30° to 55° C.
  • the time during which the present processing is effected with the color developer is generally in the range of 20 seconds to 5 minutes, preferably 30 seconds to 200 seconds, more preferably 60 seconds to 150 seconds.
  • the present processing method can also be applied to color reversal processing.
  • the black-and-white developer to be used in the color reversal processing is a 1st black-and-white developer to be used in the reversal processing of commonly known color light-sensitive materials.
  • Well known various additives which have been incorporated in black-and-white developers which have been widely used for processing solutions for black-and-white silver halide photographic materials can be incorporated in the 1st black-and-white developer for color reversal light-sensitive materials.
  • Typical examples of such additives include developing agents such as 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone, methol and hydroquinone, preservatives such as sulfite, accelerators comprising alkali such as sodium hydroxide, sodium carbonate and potassium carbonate, inorganic or organic inhibitors such as potassium bromide, 2-methylbenzimidazole and methylbenzthiazole, water softners such as polyphosphoric acid, and development inhibitors comprising iodides (in a slight amount) or mercapto compound.
  • developing agents such as 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone, methol and hydroquinone
  • preservatives such as sulfite
  • accelerators comprising alkali such as sodium hydroxide, sodium carbonate and potassium carbonate
  • inorganic or organic inhibitors such as potassium bromide, 2-methylbenzimidazole and methylbenzthiazole
  • water softners such as polyphosphoric acid
  • development inhibitors comprising iodides (in a slight amount) or mer
  • the present processing process essentially consists of the above mentioned color development step and the subsequent desilvering step, preferably followed by rinse step and/or stabilizing step.
  • the rinsing water to be used in the rinsing step can comprise various surface active agents to inhibit unevennes due to waterdrop at the time of drying the light-sensitive material after processing.
  • these surface active agents include polyethylene glycol type nonionic surface active agents, polyvalent alcohol type nonionic surface active agents, alkylbenzenesulfonate type anionic surface active agents, higher alcohol sulfuric ester type anionic surface active agents, alkylnaphthalene sulfonate type anionic surface active agents, quaternary ammonium salt type cationic surface active agents, amine salt type cationic surface active agents, amino acid type amphoteric surface active agents, and betaine type amphoteric surface active agents.
  • nonionic surface active agents can react with various ions introduced into the system upon processing to form insoluble substances. Therefore, nonionic surface active agents may be preferably used.
  • alkylphenol-ethylene oxide adducts may be preferably used. Particularly preferred examples of such alkylphenols include octyl, nonyl, dodecyl, and dinonylphenol.
  • the molar amount of ethylene oxide to be added is preferably 8 to 14.
  • silicone surface active agents which exhibit a high antifoaming effect, may be preferably used.
  • the rinsing solution may contain various anti-bacterial agents and anti-fungal agents to inhibit the formation of fur and the proliferation of mold on the light-sensitive material which has been processed.
  • anti-bacterial agents and anti-fungal agents include thiazolylbenzimidazole compounds as disclosed in JP-A-57-157244 and 58-105145, isothiazolone compounds as disclosed in JP-A-54-27424 and 57-8542, chlorophenolic compounds such as trichlorophenol, bromophenolic compounds, organic tin or zinc compounds, thiocyanic or isothiocyanic compounds, acid amide compounds, diazine or triazine compounds, thiourea compounds, benzotriazolealkyl guanidine compounds, quaternary ammonium salts such as benzammonium chloride, antibiotics such as penicilline, and general-purpose anti-fungal agents as described in Journal of Antibacterial and Antifungal Agents", Vol. 1, No. 5, p 207-223 (19
  • JP-A-48-83820 Various germicides as described in JP-A-48-83820 can be used.
  • Various chelating agents may be preferably incorporated in the system.
  • these chelating agents include aminopolycarboxylic acid such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid and diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, organic phosphonic acid such as 1-hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphonic acid and ethylenediamine-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenephosphonic acid, and hydrolyzates of anhydrous maleic polymers as described in European Patent 345172A1.
  • aminopolycarboxylic acid such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid and diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid
  • organic phosphonic acid such as 1-hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphonic acid and ethylenediamine-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenephosphonic acid
  • hydrolyzates of anhydrous maleic polymers as described in European Patent 345172A1.
  • Preservatives which can be incorporated in the above mentioned fixing solution or blix solution may be preferably incorporated in the rinsing solution.
  • the stabilizing solution to be used in the stabilizing step there can be used a processing solution for stabilizing dye images.
  • a processing solution include solution preferably with a pH value of 3 to 6 having a buffering capability, and solution containing an aldehyde (e.g., formalin, glutaraldehyde), hexamethylenetetramine compound, hexahydrotriazine compound or N-methylol compound disclosed in JP-A-2-153348 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,859,574.
  • the stabilizing solution may contain all compounds which can be incorporated in the rinsing solution.
  • the stabilizing solution may optionally further contain an ammonium compound such as ammonium chloride and ammonium sulfite, metallic compound such as Bi and Al, fluorescent brightening agent, various dye stabilizers such as N-methylol compound as described in JP-A-2-153350 and JP-A-2-153348, and U.S. Pat. No. 4,859,574, film hardener, and alkanolamine as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,786,581. A stabilization method using the above mentioned dye stabilizers may also be used.
  • an ammonium compound such as ammonium chloride and ammonium sulfite
  • metallic compound such as Bi and Al
  • fluorescent brightening agent fluorescent brightening agent
  • various dye stabilizers such as N-methylol compound as described in JP-A-2-153350 and JP-A-2-153348, and U.S. Pat. No. 4,859,574, film hardener, and alkanolamine as described in U.S. Pat. No
  • the rinsing step or stabilizing step is preferably effected in a multistage countercurrent process.
  • the number of stages is preferably 2 to 4.
  • the replenishment rate of the rinsing solution or stabilizing solution is generally 1 to 50 times, preferably 2 to 30 times, more preferably 2 to 15 times the amount of the solution to be brought over from the preceding bath per unit area.
  • water to be used in the rinsing step or stabilizing step there may be preferably used tap water, water obtained by deionizing water with an ion exchange resin so that Ca and Mg concentrations are each reduced to 5 mg/l or less, and water sterilized by halogen, ultraviolet ray, etc.
  • water for making up for the evaporation loss there may be used tap water, preferably the above mentioned deionized or sterilized water which can be preferably used in the the rinsing step or stabilizing step.
  • a proper amount of water or correcting solution or processing replenisher may be preferably supplied into the system.
  • the overflow solution from the rinsing step or stabilizing step can be flown into a preceding bath having a fixing capability to reduce the amount of the processing solution to be discharged.
  • the processing method of the present invention may be preferably effected by means of an automatic developing machine. Conveying methods in such an automatic developing machine are described in JP-A-60-191257, JP-A-60-191258, and JP-A-60-191259. In order to speed up the processing, the crossover time between processing baths in the automatic developing machine is preferably minimized. An automatic developing machine with a crossover time of 10 seconds or less is described in JP-A-1-319038.
  • a replenisher may be preferably supplied into the system depending on the amount of the light-sensitive material which has been processed in order to make up for the consumption of components of the processing solution accompanied by the processing of the light-sensitive material or inhibit the accummulation of undesired components eluted from the light-sensitive material in the processing solution.
  • two or more procesing baths may be provided in each processing step.
  • a countercurrent process may be preferably used wherein a replenisher flows from one bath to its preceding bath.
  • the rinse step and the stabilizing step may be preferably effected in a 2- to 4-stage cascade system.
  • the amount of the replenisher to be supplied may be preferably reduced so far as the change in the composition of each processing solution doesn't cause any deterioration of photographic properties or other troubles such as solution contamination.
  • the amount of the color developer replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 100 ml to 1,500 ml, preferably 100 ml to 1,000 ml per m 2 of light-sensitive material.
  • the amount of the color developer replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 20 ml to 500 ml, preferably 30 ml to 200 ml per m 2 of light-sensitive material.
  • the amount of the bleaching solution replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 10 ml to 500 ml, preferably 10 ml to 160 ml per m 2 of light-sensitive material.
  • the amount of the bleaching solution replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 20 ml to 300 ml, preferably 50 ml to 150 ml per m 2 of light-sensitive material.
  • the amount of the blix solution replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 100 ml to 3,000 ml, preferably 200 ml to 1,300 ml per m 2 of light-sensitive material.
  • the amount of the blix solution replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 20 ml to 300 ml, preferably 50 ml to 200 ml per m 2 of light-sensitive material.
  • the blix solution replenisher may be supplied as monobath or separately as bleaching composition and fixing composition. Alternatively, the overflow solution from the bleaching bath and/or the fixing bath may be mixed to provide a blix solution replenisher.
  • the amount of the fixing solution replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 300 ml to 3,000 ml, preferably 300 ml to 1,000 ml per m 2 of light-sensitive material.
  • the amount of the fixing solution replenisher to be supplied is in the range of 20 ml to 300 ml, preferably 50 ml to 200 ml per m 2 of light-sensitive material.
  • the replenishment rate of the rinsing solution or stabilizing solution is generally 1 to 50 times, preferably 2 to 30 times, more preferably 2 to 15 times the amount of the solution to be brought over from the preceding bath per unit area.
  • various regeneration methods may be preferably used in combination.
  • the regeneration of the processing solution may be effected while the processing solution is circulated in the automatic developing machine.
  • the processing solution may be removed from the processing bath, subjected to a proper regeneration treatment, and then returned to the processing bath as replenisher.
  • the regeneration of the developer can be accomplished by the ion exchange with an anionic exchange resin, the removal of accummulated substances by electrodialysis and/or the addition of a chemical as regenerant.
  • the percent regeneration is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 70% or more.
  • an anionic exchange resin there may be used one commercially available.
  • An ion exchanger having a high selectivity as disclosed in JP-A-63-11005 may be preferably used.
  • the metal chelate bleaching agent contained in the bleaching solution and/or blix solution becomes a reduced state upon bleach.
  • the bleaching capacity is lowered.
  • the image dye becomes a leuco dye, causing a drop in the image density. Therefore, the bleaching solution and/or blix solution may be preferably subjected to a continuous regeneration treatment in linkage with processing.
  • an air pump may be preferably used to blow air through the bleaching solution and/or blix solution so that the metal chelate of the reduced state is reoxidized with oxygen (so-called aeration).
  • the regeneration of the processing solution may also be accomplished by the addition of an oxidizing agent such as hydrogen peroxide, persulfate and bromate.
  • the regeneration of the fixing solution or blix solution can be accomplished by electrolytic reduction of accummulated silver ions.
  • Accummulated halogen ions may be preferably removed by an anionic exchange resin to maintain the desired fixing properties.
  • ion exchange or ultrafiltration may be used.
  • ultrafiltration may be preferably used.
  • the photographic light-sensitive material adapted for the present processing can comprise at least one blue-sensitive layer, at least one green-sensitive layer and at least one red-sensitive layer on a support.
  • the number of silver halide emulsion layers and light-insensitive layers and the order of arrangement of these layers are not specifically limited.
  • the silver halide photographic material comprises light-sensitive layers consisting of a plurality of silver halide emulsion layers having substantially the same color sensitivity and different light sensitivities on a support.
  • the light-sensitive layers are unit light-sensitive layers having a color sensitivity to any of blue light, green light and red light.
  • these unit light-sensitive layers are normally arranged in the order of red-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer and blue-sensitive layer as viewed from the support side.
  • the order of arrangement can be optionally reversed depending on the purpose of application.
  • two unit light-sensitive layers having the same color sensitivity can be arranged with a unit light-sensitive layer having a different color sensitivity interposed therebetween.
  • Light-insensitive layers such as various interlayers can be provided between these silver halide light-sensitive layers and on the uppermost layer and lowermost layer.
  • interlayers can comprise couplers, DIR compounds or the like as described in JP-A-61-43748, JP-A-59-113438, JP-A-59-113440, JP-A-61-20037 and JP-A-61-20038.
  • interlayers can further comprise a color stain inhibitor, ultraviolet absorbent, stain inhibitor, etc. as commonly used.
  • the plurality of silver halide emulsion layers constituting each unit light-sensitive layer can be preferably in a two-layer structure, i.e., high sensitivity emulsion layer and low sensitivity emulsion layer, as described in West German Patent 1,121,470 and British Patent 923,045.
  • these layers are preferably arranged in such an order that the light sensitivity becomes lower towards the support.
  • a light-insensitive layer can be provided between these silver halide emulsion layers.
  • a low sensitivity emulsion layer can be provided remote from the support while a high sensitivity emulsion layer can be provided nearer to the support.
  • a low sensitivity blue-sensitive layer (BL), a high sensitivity blue-sensitive layer (BH), a high sensitivity green-sensitive layer (GH), a low sensitivity green-sensitive layer (GL), a high sensitivity red-sensitive layer (RH), and a low sensitivity red-sensitive layer (RL) can be arranged in this order remote from the support.
  • BH, BL, GL, GH, RH, and RL can be arranged in this order remote from the support.
  • BH, BL, GH, GL, RL, and RH can be arranged in this order remote from the support.
  • a blue-sensitive layer, GH, RH, GL, and RL can be arranged in this order remote from the support.
  • a blue-sensitive layer, GL, RL, GH, and RH can be arranged in this order remote from the support.
  • a layer arrangement can be used such that the uppermost layer is a silver halide emulsion layer having the highest sensitivity, the middle layer is a silver halide emulsion layer having a lower sensitivity, and the lowermost layer is a silver halide emulsion layer having a lower sensitivity than that of the middle layer.
  • the light sensitivity becomes lower towards the support.
  • the layer structure comprises three layers having different light sensitivities, a middle sensitivity emulsion layer, a high sensitivity emulsion layer and a low sensitivity emulsion layer can be arranged in this order remote from the support in a color-sensitive layer as described in JP-A-59-2024643.
  • the dried thickness of all the constituting layers of the color light-sensitive material except for support and its subbing layer is preferably in the range of 20.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 18.0 ⁇ m or less to accomplish the objects of the present invention.
  • the specification of the dried film thickness is based on the color developing agent to be incorporated into these constituting layers during and after processing. This means that bleach fogging or stain during the storage of images after processing depends greatly on the amount of the remaining color developing agent. In respect to the occurrence of bleach fogging or stain, the increase in magenta color probably due to the green-sensitive layer is greater than that in cyan and yellow colors.
  • the lower limit of the specified film thickness is preferably lowered from the above mentioned specification to such an extent that the properties of the light-sensitive material is not remarkably deteriorated.
  • the lower limit of the total dried thickness of the layers constituting the light-sensitive material except support and its subbing layer is 12.0 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit of the total dried thickness of the constituting layers provided between the light-sensitive layer nearest to the support and the subbing layer of the support is 1.0 ⁇ m.
  • the reduction of the film thickness may be effected in either light-sensitive layer or light-insensitive layer.
  • the film thickness of the multilayer color light-sensitive material of the present invention can be determined in accordance with the following method:
  • the light-sensitive material specimen is stored at a temperature of 25° C. and a relative humidity of 50% for 7 days.
  • the total thickness of the specimen is determined.
  • the coating layers are then removed from the support.
  • the thickness of the support is determined.
  • the difference in the two measurements is the total thickness of the coating layers.
  • the measurement of the film thickness can be accomplished by means of a contact type thickness meter comprising a piezoelectric element (e.g., K-402B Stand, available from Anritus Electric Co., Ltd.).
  • the removal of the coating layers from the support can be effected by the use of an aqueous solution of sodium hypochlorite.
  • a section of the specimen is photographed by a scanning type electron microscope preferably at 3,000 power or more.
  • the total thickness of the coating layers on the support and the thickness of each of these coating layers are measured and compared to the measured value of the toal thickness of the coating layers obtained by the film thickness meter (absolute value of the measured thickness) to calculate the thickness of each of these coating layers.
  • the percent swelling of the light-sensitive material of the present invention is preferably in the range of 50 to 200%, more preferably 70 to 150%. If this value deviates from the above specified range, the remaining amount of the color developing agent increases, giving adverse effects on photographic properties, desilvering property and other picture qualities, and film physical properties such as film strength.
  • the swelling rate of the light-sensitive material of the present invention (as determined by T1/2, which is defined by the time required to reach half the saturated swollen film thickness (90% of the maximum swollen film thickness in the color developer (at a temperature of 30° C., 195 seconds) ) is preferably in the range of 15 seconds or less, more preferably 9 seconds or less.
  • the silver halide to be incorporated in the photographic emulsion layer in the color light-sensitive material of the present invention may be any silver halide composition such as silver chloride, silver bromide, silver bromochloride, silver bromoiodide, silver chloroiodide and silver bromochloroiodide.
  • Silver halide grains in the photographic emulsions may be so-called regular grains having a regular crystal form, such as cube, octahedron and tetradecahedron, or those having an irregular crystal form such as sphere and tabular, those having a crystal defect such as twinning plane, or those having a combination of these crystal forms.
  • the silver halide grains may be either fine grains of about 0.2 ⁇ m or smaller in diameter or giant grains having a projected area diameter of up to about 10 ⁇ m.
  • the emulsion may be either a monodisperse emulsion or a polydisperse emulsion.
  • the preparation of the silver halide photographic emulsion which can be used in the present invention can be accomplished by any suitable method as described in Research Disclosure No. 17643 (December 1978), pp. 22-23, and No. 307105 (November 1989), pp. 863-865, "I. Emulsion Preparation and Types", and No. 18716 (November 1979), page 648, Glafkides, "Chimie et Physique Photographique", Paul Montel (1967), G. F. Duffin, "Photographic Emulsion Chemistry", Focal Press, 1966, and V. L. Zelikman et al., “Making and Coating Photographic Emulsion Focal Press", 1964.
  • monodisperse emulsions as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,574,628 and 3,655,394, and British Patent 1,413,748 can be preferably used in the present invention.
  • Tabular grains having an aspect ratio of about 5 or more can also be used in the present invention.
  • the preparation of such tabular grains can be easily accomplished by any suitable method as described in Gutoff, "Photograpahic Science and Engineering", vol. 14, pp. 248-257, 1970, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,434,226, 4,414,310, 4,433,048, and 4,439,520, and British Patent 2,112,157.
  • the individual silver halide crystals may have either a homogeneous structure or a heterogeneous structure composed of an inner portion and an outer portion differing in halogen composition, or may have a layered structure. Furthermore, the grains may have fused thereto a silver halide having a different halogen composition or a compound other than silver halide, e.g., silver thiocyanate, lead oxide, etc. by an epitaxial junction.
  • the silver halide emulsion to be used in the present invention is normally subjected to physical ripening, chemical ripening and spectral sensitization. Additives to be used in these steps are described in Research Disclosure Nos. 17643, 18716 and 307105 as tabulated below.
  • Preferred yellow couplers include those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,933,501, 4,022,620, 4,326,024, 4,401,752, 4,248,961, 3,973,968, 4,314,023, and 4,511,649, JP-B-58-10739, British Patents 1,425,020 and 1,476,760, and European Patent 249,473A.
  • Preferred magenta couplers include 5-pyrazolone compounds and pyrazoloazole compounds. Particularly preferred are those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,310,619, 4,351,897, 3,061,432, 3,725,064, 4,500,630, 4,540,654, and 4,556,630, European Patent 73,636, JP-A-60-33552, JP-A-60-43659, JP-A-61-72238, JP-A-60-35730, JP-A-55-118034, and JP-A-60-185951, RD Nos. 24220 (June 1984) and 24230 (June 1984), and WO(PCT)88/04795.
  • the effects of the present invention on bleach fogging and stain become remarkable particularly with pyrazoloazole couplers.
  • Cyan couplers include naphthol and phenol couplers. Preferred are those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,052,212, 4,146,396, 4,228,233, 4,296,200, 2,369,929, 2,801,171, 2,772,162, 2,895,826, 3,772,002, 3,758,308, 4,334,011, 4,327,173, 3,446,622, 4,333,999, 4,753,871, 4,451,559, 4,427,767, 4,690,889, 4,254,212, and 4,296,199, West German Patent Disclosure No. 3,329,729, European Patents 121,365A and 249,453A, and JP-A-61-42658.
  • Colored couplers for correction of unnecessary absorptions of the developed color preferably include those described in Research Disclosure No. 17643, VII-G, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,163,670, 4,004,929, and 4,138,258, JP-B-57-39413, and British Patent 1,146,368. Furthermore, couplers for correction of unnecessary absorptions of the developed color by a fluorescent dye released upon coupling as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,774,181 and couplers containing as a separatable group a dye precursor group capable of reacting with a developing agent to form a dye as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,777,120 can be preferably used.
  • Couplers which form a dye having moderate diffusibility preferably include those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,366,237, British Patent 2,125,570, European Patent 96,570, and West German Patent Publication No. 3,234,533.
  • Couplers capable of releasing a photographically useful residual upon coupling can also be used in the present invention.
  • DIR couplers which release a developing inhibitor are described in the patents cited in RD 17643, VII-F, JP-A-57-151944, JP-A-57-154234, JP-A-60-184248, and JP-A-63-37346, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,248,962, and 4,782,012.
  • Couplers capable of imagewise releasing a nucleating agent or a developing accelerator at the time of development preferably include those described in British Patents 2,097,140 and 2,131,188, and JP-A-59-57638 and JP-A-59-170840.
  • the photographic material according to the present invention can further comprise competing couplers as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,130,427, polyequivalent couplers as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,283,472, 4,338,393, and 4,310,618, DIR redox compound-releasing couplers, DIR coupler releasing couplers, DIR coupler-releasing redox compound or DIR redox-releasing redox compound as described in JP-A-60-185950 and JP-A-62-24252, couplers capable of releasing a dye which returns to its original color after release as described in European Patent 173,302A, couplers capable of releasing a bleach accelerator as described in RD Nos.
  • competing couplers as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,130,427, polyequivalent couplers as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,283,472, 4,338,393, and 4,310,618, DIR redox compound-releasing couplers, DIR coupler
  • high boiling solvents to be used in the oil-in-water dispersion process are described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,322,027.
  • Specific examples of high boiling organic solvents having a boiling point of 175° C. or higher at normal pressure which can be used in the oil-in-water dispersion process include phthalic esters (e.g., dibutyl phthalate, dicylcohexyl phthalate, di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate, decyl phthalate, bis(2,4-di-t-amylphenyl)phthalate, bis(2,4-di-t-amylphenyl) isophthalate, bis(1,1-diethylpropyl)phthalate), phosphoric or phosphonic esters (e.g., triphenyl phosphate, tricresyl phosphate, 2-ethylhexyl diphenyl phosphate, tricyclohexyl phosphate, tri-2-
  • an organic solvent having a boiling point of about 30° C. or higher, preferably 50° C. to about 160° C.
  • Typical examples of such an organic solvent include ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethyl propionate, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2-ethoxyethyl acetate, and dimethylformamide.
  • couplers can impregnate a loadable latex polymer (as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,203,716) in the presence or absence of the above mentioned high boiling organic solvent or can be dissolved in a water-insoluble and organic solvent-soluble polymer before being emulsion-dispersed in an aqueous solution of hydrophilic colloid.
  • homopolymers or copolymers as described in International Patent Disclosure No. W088/00723, pp. 12-30 can be used.
  • acrylamide polymers may be preferably used for the purpose of stabilizing dye images or like purposes.
  • Suitable supports which can be used in the present invention are described in the above cited RD 17643 (page 28) and 18716 (right column on page 647 to left column on page 648).
  • the present invention can be applied to various color light-sensitive materials such as color negative films for motion picture, color reversal film for slide or television, color paper, direct positive color paper, color positive film and color reversal paper.
  • the color reversal film may be of the so-called coupler-in-emulsion type (coupler incorporated in the light-sensitive material) or the so-called coupler-in-developer type (coupler incorporated in the developer).
  • a multilayer color light-sensitive material was prepared as Specimen 101 by coating on a undercoated cellulose triacetate film support various layers having the following compositions.
  • the coated amount of silver halide and colloidal silver is represented in g/m 2 calculated in terms of the amount of silver.
  • the coated amount of couplers, additives and gelatin is represented in g/m 2 .
  • the coated amount of sensitizing dye is represented in mols per mol of silver halide contained in the same layer.
  • 1,2-benzisothiazoline-3-one, n-butyl-p-hydroxybenzoate, and 2-phenoxyethanol were incorporated in the specimen in amounts of 200 ppm on the average, about 1,000 ppm and about 10,000 ppm based on gelatin, respectively.
  • the specimen further comprised B-4, B-5, W-2, W-3, F-1, F-2, F-3, F-4, F-5, F-6, F-7, F-8, F-9, F-10, F-11, F-12, F-13, and iron salts, lead salts, gold salts, platinum salts, iridium salts, and rhodium salts.
  • Specimen 101 thus prepared was exposed to white light (color temperature of light source: 4,800° K.) through an optical wedge, and then processed by means of an automatic developing machine for motion picture in the following process. The processing was continued until the accumulated replenishment of each processing solution reached 2.5 times the capacity of the tank.
  • the processing properties set forth below were the results of the processing which was effected at that time.
  • the washing step was effected in a countercurrent process wherein the washing water flows from (2) to (1).
  • the oveflow solution from the washing tank was all introduced into the fixing bath.
  • the bleaching bath was provided with a subtank through which air was blown into the bleaching bath at a rate of about 200 ml/min. to aerate the bleaching solution.
  • the processing baths were each provided with an agitating means as described in JP-A-62-183460 so that a jet of the processing solution was allowed to collide with the emulsion surface of the light-sensitive material.
  • the replenishment of the blix bath was accomplished by replenishing the bleaching bath and the fixing bath in such an arrangement that the upper portion of the bleaching bath and the lower portion of the blix bath, and the upper portion of the fixing bath and the lower portion of the blix bath were connected to each other via a pipe in the automatic developing machine so that the overflow solution from the bleaching bath and the fixing bath resulted by replenishing was all introduced into the blix bath.
  • the amount of the developer to be brought over to the bleaching bath, the amount of the bleaching solution to be brought over to the blix bath, the amount of the blix solution to be brought over to the fixing bath, and the amount of the fixing solution to be brought over to the washing bath were 2.5 ml, 2.0 ml, 2.0 ml, and 2.0 ml per m of 35-mm wide light-sensitive material, respectively.
  • the time for crossover was 5 seconds in all the steps. This crossover time is included in the processing time at the previous step.
  • the various processing solutions had the following compositions:
  • Tap water was passed through a mixed bed column packed with an H-type strongly acidic cation exchange resin (Amberlite IR-120B available from Rohm & Haas) and an OH-type strongly basic anion exchange resin (Amberlite IRA-400 available from the same company) so that the calcium and magnesium ion concentrations were each reduced to 3 mg/l or less.
  • Dichlorinated sodium isocyanurate and sodium sulfate were then added to the solution in amounts of 20 mg and 150 mg/l, respectively.
  • the washing solution thus obtained had a pH value of 6.5 to 7.5.
  • Specimen 101 thus processed was measured for the remaining amount of silver on the maximum density portion by means of a fluorescent X-ray analyzer. The results are set forth in Table 1. The specimen was also measured for green density on the minimum density portion. Furthermore, another Specimen 101 was processed in the same manner as mentioned above except that the bleaching solution to be used in the automatic developing machine was replaced by the following reference bleaching solution causing no bleach fogging. The difference in the density on Dmin portion from that obtained by using the reference bleaching solution was determined as bleach fogging. The results are set forth in Table 1.
  • a multilayer color light-sensitive material was prepared as Specimen 102 by coating on a undercoated cellulose triacetate film support various layers having the following compositions.
  • the coated amount of each component is represented in g/m 2 .
  • the coated amount of silver halide is represented in g/m 2 as calculated in terms of amount of silver.
  • the coated amount of sensitizing dye is represented in mol per mol of silver halide contained in (Specimen 102)
  • W-1, W-2, W-3, B-4, B-5, F-1, F-2, F-3, F-4, F-5, F-6, F-7, F-8, F-9, F-10, F-11, F-12, F-13 and iron salts, lead salts, gold salts, platinum salts, iridium salts, and rhodium salts were incorporated in all these layers.
  • Specimen 102 thus prepared was exposed to white light (color temperature of light source: 4,800° K.) through an optical wedge, and then processed by means of an automatic developing machine for motion picture in the following process. The processing was continued until the accumulated replenishment of each processing solution reached 2.5 times the capacity of the running tank.
  • the processing properties set forth below were the results of the processing which was effected at that time.
  • the aeration of the bleaching bath was effected in the same manner as in Example 1.
  • the agitation in each processing bath was effected in the same manner as in Example 1.
  • the amount of the processing solution to be brought over from each processing bath to its subsequent bath was 2.2 ml per m of 35-mm wide light-sensitive material.
  • the time for crossover was 6 seconds in all the steps.
  • Table 2 shows that as compared to the comparative bleaching solutions the bleaching solutions comprising the present metal chelate compounds as bleaching agents can exhibit a sufficient bleaching capacity even upon short time bleach and cause little bleach fogging and little increase in stain with time.
  • a multilayer color photographic paper specimen was prepared by coating on a polyethylene both sides-laminated paper support which had been corona-discharged and then provided with a gelatin subbing layer containing sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate various photographic constiuent layers having the following compositions.
  • the coating liquids for these layers were prepared as follows:
  • a silver bromochloride emulsion A (3:7 mixture (ratio of molar amount of silver) of a large size emulsion A of cubic grains with a mean grain size of 0.88 ⁇ m and a grain size distribution fluctuation coefficient of 0.08 and a small size emulsion A of cubic grains with a mean grain size of 0.70 ⁇ m and a grain size distribution fluctuation coefficient of 0.10, both having 0.3 mol % silver bromide localized on the surface thereof
  • Emulsion Dispersion A and Silver Bromochloride Emulsion A were then mixed and dissolved to prepare a coating liquid for the 1st layer
  • Coating liquids for the 2nd to 7th layers were prepared in the same manner as in the 1st layer coating liquid. There was incorporated in each layer a sodium salt of sodium salt of 1-oxy-3,5-dichloro-s-triazine as gelatin hardener.
  • Cpd-10 and Cpd-11 were added to each of these layers in amounts of 25.0 mg/m 2 and 50.0 mg/m 2 , respectively.
  • the green-sensitive emulsion layer and the red-sensitive emulsion layer was incorporated 1-(5-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole in amounts of 8.5 ⁇ 10 -5 mol, 7.7 ⁇ 10 -4 mol and 2.5 ⁇ 10 -4 mol per mol of silver halide.
  • composition of these layers will be set forth below.
  • the figure indicate coated amount in g/m 2 .
  • the coated amount of silver halide emulsion is represented as calculated in terms of amount of silver.
  • Polyethylene-laminated paper [containing a white pigment (TiO 2 ) and a bluish dye (ultramarine) on the 1st layer side]
  • the remaining amount of silver on the maximum density portion was measured by fluorescent X-ray analysis.
  • the bleach fogging was determined as difference in the green density on Dmin portion from that obtained with the following reference bleaching solution causing no bleach fogging in stead of the blix solution.
  • the specimen processed in the former processing solution was stored at a temperature of 80° C. and a relative humidity of 70% for 1 week, and then measured for increase in stain after processing.
  • the results set forth in Table 3 show that as compared to the blix solutions comprising the comparative compounds the blix solution having a bleaching capacity comprising the chelate compounds of the present invention can reduce the remaining amount of silver and cause little bleach fogging and little increase in stain after processing.
  • the blix solution comprising Comparative Compound B exhibits a sufficient bleach capacity shortly after being prepared, but shows a rapid drop in the bleaching capacity and a remarkable stain in the solution after running. On the contrary, the blix solutions comprising the metal chelate compounds of the present invention cause little stain and remain stable.
  • the light-sensitive material specimen as prepared in Example 3 was stepwise exposed to light (color temperature of light source: 3,200° K.) through an optical wedge, and then processed with the following processing solutions in the following processing steps.
  • the remaining amount of silver on the maximum density portion was measured by fluorescent x-ray analysis.
  • the blue density on the minimum density portion was also measured.
  • the specimen was then stored at a temperature of 80° C. and a relative humidity of 70% for 8 days to determine the amount of stain with time.
  • the rinse step is effected in a 4-tank countercurrent process wherein the washing water flows from (4) to (1).
  • the various processing solutions had the following compositions:
  • Ion-exchanged water (calcium and magnesium concentrations: not more than 3 ppm each)
  • Table 4 shows that as compared to the comparative blix solutions the blix solutions comprising the present compounds exhibit excellent desilvering properties and cause little bleach fogging and little stain with time.
  • a multilayer color light-sensitive material was prepared as Specimen 501 by coating on a undercoated cellulose triacetate film support various layers having the following compositions.
  • the coated amount of silver halide and colloidal silver is represented in g/m 2 calculated in terms of the amount of silver.
  • the coated amount of couplers, additives and gelatin is represented in g/m 2 .
  • the coated amount of sensitizing dye is represented in mol per mol of silver halide contained in the same layer.
  • the bleaching bath was provided at the bottom thereof with a pipe having a large number of 0.2-mm ⁇ pores through which air was supplied at a rate of 200 ml/minute.
  • the washing step was effected in a countercurrent process wherein the washing water flows from (2) to (1).
  • the amount of the developer brought over to the bleaching step, and the amount of the fixing solution brought over to the washing step were 2.5 ml, and 2.0 ml per m of 35-mm wide light-sensitive material respectively.
  • the time for crossover was 5 seconds in all the steps. This crossover time is included in the processing time at the previous step.
  • the various processing solutions had the following compositions:
  • the chelating compound used is an organic acid constituting a ferric ammonium salt of organic acid to be incorporated in the bleaching agent.
  • Tap water was passed through a mixed bed column packed with an H-type strongly acidic cation exchange resin (Amberlite IR-120B available from Rohm & Haas) and an OH-type strongly basic anion exchange resin (Amberlite IRA-400 available from the same company) so that the calcium and magnesium ion concentrations were each reduced to 3 mg/l or less.
  • Dichlorinated sodium isocyanurate and sodium sulfate were then added to the solution in amounts of 20 mg/l and 150 mg/l, respectively.
  • the washing solution thus obtained had a pH value of 6.5 to 7.5.
  • the photographic light-sensitive material specimens thus processed were then measured for the remaining amount of silver on the maximum color density portion by means of a fluorescent X-ray analyzer. The results are set forth in Table 5.
  • the specimens thus processed were measured for density in the same manner as described above. Dmin values were read from the characteristic curve.
  • Specimen 311 described in JP-A-2-28637 was processed in accordance with the following steps:
  • the washing step was effected in a countercurrent process wherein the washing water flows from (2) to (1).
  • the overflow solution from the bleaching bath was all introduced into the blix bath.
  • the overflow solution from the washing tank (1) was all introduced into the fixing bath, and the overflow solution of fixing bath was all introduced into the blix bath.
  • the amount of the fixing solution brought over to the washing step was 2.0 ml per m of 35-mm wide light-sensitive material.
  • composition of the various processing solutions used were as follows:
  • the specimens thus processed were measured for density in the same manner as described above. Dmix values measured by green light were read from the characteristic curve.
  • Specimen 311 as described in JP-A-2-28637 was processed with the same reference bleaching solution as used in Example 5, and then measured for Dmin in the same manner as described above. Bleach fogging and Dmin were calculated on the basis of the Dmin value of the reference bleaching solution in the same manner as in Example 5.
  • the reference bleaching solution had a Dmix value of 0.57. The results are set forth in Table 6.
  • Comparative Compounds A, B, C, D and E used were as used in Example 5.
  • Table 6 shows that as compared to the comparative compounds the present compounds are capable of reducing the remainining amount of silver while contributing to eliminating bleach fogging and stain during the storage of dye images after processing.
  • a multilayer color photographic paper specimen was prepared by coating on a polyethylene both side-laminated paper support which had been corona-discharged and then provided with a gelatin subbing layer containing sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate various photographic constiuent layers having the following compositions.
  • the coating solutions for these layers were prepared as follows:
  • a silver bromochloride emulsion A (3:7 mixture (ratio of molar amount of silver) of a large size emulsion A of cubic grains with a mean grain size of 0.88 ⁇ m and a grain size distribution fluctuation coefficient of 0.08 and a small size emulsion A of cubic grains with a mean grain size of 0.70 m and a grain size distribution fluctuation coefficient of 0.10, both having 0.3 mol % silver bromide localized on the surface thereof
  • Emulsion Dispersion A and Silver Bromochloride Emulsion A were then mixed and dissolved to prepare a coating solution for the 1st layer having the following composition.
  • Coating solutions for the 2nd to 7th layers were prepared in the same manner as in the 1st layer coating solution. There was incorporated in each layer a sodium salt of 1-oxy-3,5-dichloro-s-triazine as gelatin hardener.
  • Cpd-10 and Cpd-11 were added to each of these layers in amounts of 25.0 mg/m 2 and 50.0 mg/m 2 , respectively.
  • the green-sensitive emulsion layer and the red-sensitive emulsion layer was incorporated 1-(5-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole in amounts of 8.5 ⁇ 10 -5 mol, 7.7 ⁇ 10 -4 mol and 2.5 ⁇ 10 -4 mol per mol of silver halide.
  • composition of these layers will be set forth below.
  • the figure indicate coated amount in g/m 2 .
  • the coated amount of silver halide emulsion is represented as calculated in terms of amount of silver.
  • Polyethylene-laminated paper [containing a white pigment (TiO 2 ) and a bluish dye (ultramarine) on the 1st layer side]
  • Comparative Compound A* is the same as Comparative Compound A in Example 5.
  • Fuji Color SUPER HG400 (Production No. 311130) and Fuji Color REALA (Production No. 861016) were processed in the same manner as in Specimens 601 to 618 in Example 6. As a result, results similar to that of Example 6 were confirmed.
  • a multilayer color light-sensitive material was prepared as Specimen 902 by coating on a undercoated cellulose triacetate film support various layers having the following compositions.
  • the coated amount of silver halide and colloidal silver is represented in g/m 2 as calculated in terms of amount of silver.
  • the coated amount of coupler, additive and gelatin is represented in g/m 2 .
  • the coated amount of sensitizing dye is represented in mol per mol of silver halide contained in the same layer.
  • the symbols indicating additives have the following meanings.
  • the additives having a plurality of effects are represented by the symbol indicating one of the effects.
  • UV ultraviolet absorbent
  • Solv high boiling organic solvent
  • ExF dye
  • ExS sensitizing dye
  • ExC cyan coupler
  • ExM magenta coupler
  • ExY yellow coupler
  • Cpd additive
  • 1,2-benzisothiazoline-3-one, n-butyl-p-hydroxybenzoate, and 2-phenoxyethanol were incorporated in the specimen in amounts of 200 ppm on the average, about 1,000 ppm and about 10,000 ppm based on gelatin, respectively.
  • the specimen further comprised B-4, B-5, F-1, F-2, F-3, F-4, F-5, F-6, F-7, F-8, F-9, F-10, F-11, F-12, and iron salts, lead salts, gold salts, platinum salts, iridium salts, and rhodium salts.
  • surface active agents W-1, W-2, and W-3 were added to each of these layers as coating aid or emulsion dispersant.
  • the specimen thus prepared was cut into 35-m wide strips, worked, wedgewise exposed to white light (color temperature of light source: 4,800° K.), and then processed by means of a processing machine for motion picture in the following process.
  • a processing machine for motion picture for the evaluation of properties, another batch of the specimen imagewise exposed to light was processed using the developer until the accumulated replenishment of color developer reached three times the capacity of the mother liquid tank.
  • the composition of the bleaching solution used in the processing step were as set forth in Table 5.
  • the bleaching bath was provided at the bottom thereof with a pipe having a large number of 0.2-mm ⁇ pores through which air was blown at a rate of 200 ml/minute.
  • the washing step was effected in a countercurrent process wherein the washing water flows from (2) to (1).
  • the amount of the developer brought over to the bleaching step, and the amount of the fixing solution brought over to the washing step were each 2.0 ml per m of 35-mm wide light-sensitive material.
  • the time for crossover was 5 seconds in all the steps. This crossover time is included in the processing time at the previous step.
  • the various processing solutions had the following compositions:
  • the chelating compound used is a compound constituting a ferric chelating compound with a metal salt, which is used as the bleaching agent.
  • Tap water was passed through a mixed bed column packed with an H-type strongly acidic cation exchange resin (Amberlite IR-120B available from Rohm & Haas) and an OH-type strongly basic anion exchange resin (Amberlite IRA-400 available from the same company) so that the calcium and magnesium ion concentrations were each reduced to 3 mg/l or less.
  • Dichlorinated sodium isocyanurate and sodium sulfate were then added to the solution in amounts of 20 mg/l and 150 mg/l, respectively.
  • the washing solution thus obtained had a pH value of 6.5 to 7.5.
  • gradation ( ⁇ G ) means the "difference between the color density (D G1 ) measured by green light on the portion which has been exposed by one tenth of the exposure that gives the maximum color density measured by green light and the color density (D G2 ) measured by green light on the portion which has been exposed by one thousandth of the exposure that gives the maximum color density measured by green light on the characteristic curve.
  • Comparative Compounds A, B and C are the same as those used in Example 5.
  • Specimen 102 as prepared in Example 9 was processed in the same manner as in Example 9 except that the bleaching time was altered. The specimen thus processed was then measured for malrecovery to original color in the same manner as in Example 9 except that the bleaching solution (mother solution) contained 0.72 mol of acetic acid. The results are set forth in Table 9.
  • a multilayer color light-sensitive material was prepared as Specimen 103 by coating on a undercoated cellulose triacetate film support various layers having the following compositions.
  • the coated amount of silver halide and colloidal silver is represented in g/m 2 as calculated in terms of amount of silver.
  • the coated amount of coupler, additive and gelatin is represented in g/m 2 .
  • the coated amount of sensitizing dye is represented in mol per mol of silver halide contained in the same layer.
  • 1,2-benzisothiazoline-3-one, n-butyl-p-hydroxybenzoate, and 2-phenoxyethanol were incorporated in the specimen in amounts of 200 ppm on the average, about 1,000 ppm and about 10,000 ppm based on gelatin, respectively.
  • the specimen further comprised B-4, B-5, W-2, W-3, F-1, F-2, F-3, F-4, F-5, F-6, F-7, F-8, F-9, F-10, F-11, F-12, F-13, and iron salts, lead salts, gold salts, platinum salts, iridium salts, and rhodium salts.
  • the specimen thus prepared was worked, exposed, and then processed in the same manner as in Example 9 except that the composition of the bleaching solution was altered and the bleaching time was 40 seconds.
  • composition of the bleaching solution used in the processing step were as follows:
  • Specimen 101 as prepared in the examples in JP-A-2-44345 was worked, exposed to light, and then processed in the same manner as in Example 9 except that the bleaching time was 30 seconds and the replenishment rate of the bleaching solution was altered to alter the ratio (C/R) of the amount of the developer to be brought over to the bleach step (C) to the replenishment rate of the bleaching solution (R) as set forth in Table 11.
  • the composition of the processing solutions other than the bleaching solution were the same as that in Example 9.
  • composition of the bleaching solution used in Example 12 was as follows:
  • composition having a bleaching capacity containing a metal chelate compound of the present invention enables a rapid processing with no bleach fogging, little subsequent stain and excellent desilvering properties.
  • composition containing an organic acid enables a rapid processing with little malrecovery to original color, little subsequent gradation change and excellent desilvering properties.

Abstract

A composition for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material, which comprises at least one metal chelate compound formed of a salt of metal selected from the group consisting of Fe(III), Mn(III), Co(III), Rh(II), Rh(III), Au(III), Au(II) and Ce(IV) and a compound represented by the general formula (I): ##STR1## wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, Ra, Rb, and Rc each represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group or an aromatic group; R5 and R6 each represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an acyl group a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonyl group or a sulfinyl group, or R5 and R6 together may form a 5- or 6-membered ring; L1 represents a divalent aliphatic or aromatic group or a divalent linking group containing at least one of them; A1 represents a carboxyl group, a phosphono group, a sulfo group, a hydroxyl group, or a substituted group thereof (acidic group only) with an alkali metal atom; and t and u each represents an integer 0 or 1; provided that when R5 and R6 together form a 5- or 6-membered ring, R1, R2, R3 and R4 each does not present an aromatic ring, and when R5 and R6 together form a benzene ring, at least one of t and u represents 1, and a process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material with the processing composition.

Description

FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to a composition for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material. More particularly, the present invention relates to a processing composition containing a novel bleaching agent for use in the bleaching step after color development and a process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material with said processing composition.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
A silver halide color photographic material (hereinafter referred to as a "color light-sensitive material") is essentially imagewise exposed to light, and then subjected to color development and desilvering.
In the color development process, silver halide grains which have been exposed to light are reduced by a color developing agent to silver, and the resulting oxidation product of the color developing agent reacts with a coupler to form a dye image.
In the subsequent desilvering step, developed silver produced at the development step is oxidized (bleached) with a bleaching agent having an oxidizing power to a silver salt which is then removed from the light-sensitive layer together with unused silver halide grains by a fixing agent which renders these silver salts and silver halide soluble (fixing). Bleaching and fixing may be effected separately as bleaching step and fixing step, or together as a blix step. These processing steps are further described in James, "The Theory of Photographic Process", 4th edition, 1977.
For the purpose of maintaining desired photographic and physical properties of the dye image or for maintaining processing stability, various auxiliary steps may be added to these essential processing steps. Examples of these auxiliary steps include a rinse (with water) step, a stabilizing step, a film hardening step, and a stop step.
These processing steps are normally effected by means of an automatic developing machine. In recent years, small-sized automatic developing machines called "mini-labo" have been installed in retail stores to provide rapid processing services to customers.
Under these circumstances, it has been keenly desired to speed up processing. It has also been desired to considerably speed up the bleaching step.
However, the ferric complex of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, which has been heretofore used in the art, is essentially disadvantageous in that its oxidizing power is weak. In spite of some improvements such as the use of bleach accelerators (e.g., addition of mercapto compounds as described in U.S. Pat. No. 1,138,842), the objective, i.e., rapid bleaching has not yet been attained.
Furthermore, when such a bleach accelerator is used, the bleaching power is considerably reduced due to the deterioration of the bleach accelerator, making it impossible to reduce the replenishment rate. As a result, the objective of considerably reducing the amount of waste liquid cannot be attained.
As bleaching agents which can attain rapid bleach there have been known red prussiate, iron chloride, bromate, etc. However, red prussiate cannot be widely used due to problem of environmental protection. Iron chloride cannot be widely used due to the inconvenience of difficult handling due to metallic corrosion. Bromates cannot be widely used due to the solution instability.
It has therefore been desired to provide a bleaching agent which provides for a rapid bleaching that can be effected with ease of handling and without any problem of discharge of waste liquid.
In recent years, ferric complexes of 1,3-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid have been disclosed as bleaching agents which can meet these requirements.
However, these bleaching agents have some disadvantages. One of these disadvantages is that these bleaching agents cause bleach fogging accompanied by bleach. As a process for eliminating bleach fogging there has been proposed a process which comprises the addition of a buffer to the bleaching solution (disclosed, for example, in JP-A-1-213657). (The term "JP-A" as used herein means an "unexamined published Japanese patent application".) However, this improvement leaves much to be desired. In particular, in the case of rapid processing where color development is effected in 3 minutes, heavier bleach fogging can be caused due to the use of a highly active developer.
Further, the use of a processing solution having a bleaching capacity comprising a ferric complex of 1,3-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid causes an increase in stain during storage of the photographic material after processing.
Another problem is that the use of a bleaching solution comprising a ferric complex of 1,3-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid causes an intensification of magenta dye on the dye image portion which leads to a change in gradation during storage after processing.
A further problem is that when a shorter bleaching time is used, even though a bleaching solution comprising a ferric complex of 1,3-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid is used, since cyan dye on the image portion tends to become a leuco dye, the recovery to the original color is inhibited.
It is also a problem that when a processing solution having bleaching capacity comprising a ferric complex of 1,3-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid is used, especially at bleach-fixing step where bleaching and fixing are carried out simultaneously, the stability of the solution is extermely poor. When such a solution is subjected to a continuous processing, desilvering capacity extremely decreases as compared with the starting of the processing, or precipitation forms.
It has therefore been desired to provide a novel processing composition having a bleaching capacity which can substitute for these bleaching agents and a processing method using such a processing composition.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide a processing composition which can be easily handled and causes no environmental problem of waste liquid and a processing method using such a processing composition.
It is another object of the present invention to provide a processing composition having a bleaching capacity excellent in desilvering properties and a processing method using such a processing composition.
It is a further object of the present invention to provide a processing composition having a bleaching capacity which causes little bleach fogging and a processing method using such a processing composition.
It is a further object of the present invention to provide a processing composition having a bleaching capacity which causes little stain with time and a processing method using such a processing composition.
It is a further object of the present invention to provide a processing composition having a bleaching capacity which provides rapid bleaching properties, no deterioration in the recovery to the original color and causes little gradation change with time and a processing method using such a processing composition.
It is a further object of the present invention to provide a processing composition having a bleaching power with an excellent ageing stability and a processing method using the processing composition.
It is a further object of the present invention to provide a processing composition which can stably maintain the above mentioned properties during a continuous processing and a processing method using such a processing composition.
The above and other objects of the present invention will become more apparent from the following detailed description and examples.
The present invention provides a composition for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material, which comprises at least one metal chelate compound formed of a salt of metal selected from the group consisting of Fe(III), Mn(III), Co(III), Rh(II), Rh(III), Au(III), Au(II) and Ce(IV) and a compound represented by the general formula (I): ##STR2## wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, Ra, Rb, and Rc each represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group or an aromatic group; R5 and R6 each represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an acyl group a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonyl group or a sulfinyl group, or R5 and R6 together may form a 5- or 6-membered ring; L1 represents a divalent aliphatic or aromatic group or a divalent linking group containing at least one of them; A1 represents a carboxyl group, a phosphono group, a sulfo group, a hydroxyl group, or a substituted group thereof (acidic group only) with an alkali metal atom; and t and u each represents an integer 0 or 1; provided that when R5 and R6 together form a 5- or 6-membered ring, R1, R2, R3 and R4 each does not present an aromatic ring, and when R5 and R6 together form a benzene ring, at least one of t and u represents 1.
The present invention further provides a processing method of a silver halide color photographic material using the composition.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
In accordance with the present invention, a silver halide color photographic material which has been imagewise exposed to light and color-developed can be processed with a processing composition containing at least a compound of the present invention to effect the bleaching of developed silver at an extremely high rate with no remarkable bleach fogging which has been caused by the prior art bleaching agent which can provide a rapid bleach. This effect can be attained more remarkably when the rapid processing in 3 minutes or less is followed by the processing with a processing composition of the present invention. The composition of the present invention can also provide an excellent image preservability after processing and easy handling.
Further, if the processing composition of the present invention contains an organic acid, the recovery to the original color cannot be worsened, in addition to these effects. This effect can be attained more remarkably when the bleaching step is expedited.
Moreover, when the processing is effected at a reduced replenishment rate of the bleaching solution, the effects of the present invention can be attained remarkably. That is, an excellent image preservability after processing can be provided. An easy handling can also be provided.
The compound represented by the general formula (I) will be further described hereinafter.
In the general formula (I) of the present invention, an aliphatic group includes a straight-chain, branched or cyclic alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group, preferably containing 1 to 10 carbon atoms. A preferred example of such an aliphatic group is an alkyl group, particularly C1-4 alkyl group.
In the present invention an aromatic group includes a monocyclic or bicyclic aryl group such as a phenyl group and a naphthyl group, preferably a phenyl group.
In the present invention a group having an acyl moiety includes those having an aliphatic and aromatic acyl moiety; a sulfonyl group or a sulfinyl group is a group connected to an aliphatic group or an aromatic group; and sulfamoyl group and a carbamoyl group include unsubstituted groups thereof and aliphatic and aromatic sulfamoyl and carbamoyl groups.
The acyl group, sulfamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, sulfonyl group or sulfinyl group represented by R5 or R6 preferably contains 10 or less carbon atoms.
When R5 and R6 do not form a ring R1, R2, R3, and R4 each is preferably a hydrogen atom, and R5 and R6 each is preferably in the cis-position.
R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, Ra, Rb and Rc may contain substituents. Examples of such substituents include an alkyl group (C1-6 : e.g., methyl and ethyl), an aralkyl group (C7-11 ; e.g., phenylmethyl), an alkenyl group (C3-6 : e.g., allyl), an alkinyl group (C2-6), an alkoxy group (C1-6 : e.g., methoxy and ethoxy), an aryl group (C6-13 : e.g., phenyl and p-methylphenyl), an unsubstituted amino group, an aliphatic or aromatic amino group (C1-12 : e.g., dimethyl amino), an acylamino group (C2-13 e.g., acetylamino), a sulfonylamino group (C1-13 : e.g., methanesulfonylamino), a ureido group (C1-13), a urethane group (alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino and amino carbonyloxy: C2-13), an aryloxy group (C6-13 : e.g., phenyloxy), a sulfamoyl group (C1-13 : e.g., methylsulfamoyl), a carbamoyl group (C1-13 : e.g., carbamoyl and methylcarbamoyl), an alkylthio group (C1-6 : e.g., methylthio), an arylthio group (C6-13 : e.g., phenylthio), a sulfonyl group (C1-13 : e.g., methanesulfonyl), a sulfinyl group (C1-13 : e.g., methanesulfinyl), a hydroxy group, a halogen atom (e.g., Cl, Br, and F), a cyano group, a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a phosphono group, an aryloxycarbonyl group (C7-14 : e.g., phenyloxycarbonyl), an acyl group (C2-4 : e.g., acetyl and benzoyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (C2-14 : methoxycarbonyl), an acyloxy group (C2-14 : e.g., acetoxy), a carbonamide group (C2-14), a sulfonamide group (C1-13), and a nitro group (in the parentheses preferred carbon numbers and preferred groups are shown). These groups may be further substituted with these groups.
Preferred examples of substituents to be contained in Ra, Rb and Rc include carboxyl group, phosphono group, sulfo group, and hydroxyl group, more preferably carboxyl group and hydroxyl group, particularly carboxyl group. The hydrogen atom in acidic groups herein may be substituted with an alkali metal atom such as Na and K.
R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, Ra, Rb, Rc, and L1 may be connected to each other to form a ring.
L1 represents an aliphatic group, aromatic group or a divalent linking group containing at least one of them. Preferred examples of such a divalent linking group include an alkylene group (preferably C1-10 alkylene group), an arylane group (preferably C6-10 arylene group), an aralkylene group (preferably C7-10 aralkylene group), --O--, --S--, ##STR3## (in which R0 is a hydrogen atom, aliphatic group, aromatic group or hydroxyl group , --SO2 --, and group formed of a combination of alkylene group and arylene group. A combination of these groups may be used. These divalent linking groups may have substituents. Examples of such substituents include those described with reference to R1.
L1 may be preferably represented by the general formula (L1): ##STR4## wherein La and Lb each represents an alkylene group, an aralkylene group or an arylene group; and A represents --O--, --S--, ##STR5## (in which R01 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or hydroxyl group), --SO2 -- or a group formed of a combination thereof.
The suffixes m and n each represents an integer 0 or 1. The symbol * indicates the position at which L1 is connected to A1. Specific preferred examples of L1 will be set forth below. ##STR6##
L1 is preferably a group represented by the general formula (L1) wherein n and m each represents 0, more preferably methylene group or ethylene group.
A1 represents a carboxyl group, phosphono group, sulfo group or hydroxyl group. A1 is preferably a carboxyl group or hydroxyl group, more preferably a carboxyl group. The hydrogen atom of the acidic groups herein may be substituted with an alkali metal atom such as sodium and potassium metal atom.
The suffixes t and u in general formula (I) each represents an integer 0 or 1. At least one of t and u is preferably 1. In particular, t and u both preferably represent an integer of 1.
In the present invention, chelate compounds represented by the general formula (II) may be preferably used. ##STR7## wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, Rb, Rc, A1, L1, t and u are as defined in the general formula (I); L2 has the same meaning as L1 in the general formula (I); A2 has the same meaaning as A1 in the general formula (I), and R5 ' and R6 ' has the same meaning as R5 and R6 with the proviso that R5 ' and R6 ' are not connected to each other to form a ring.
Preferred among the groups represented by the general formula (II) is one represented by the general formula (III): ##STR8## wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 ', R6 ', A1, A2, L1, L2, t and u are as defined in the general formula (II); L3 and L4 each has the same meaning as L1 in the general formula (I); and A3 and A4 each has the same meaaning as A1 in the general formula (I).
Among compounds represented by general formula further compounds which can be preferably used in the persent invention are compounds represented by general formula (IV): ##STR9## wherein Z represents a nonmetallic atom group which forms a 5- or 6-membered ring; A1, L1, Ra, Rb, Rc, t and u each has the same meaning as those of general formula (I); R11, R12, R13 and R14 each represents a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group, provided that when the ring formed by Z is a benzene ring, at least one of t and u is 1.
Examples of the 5- or 6-membered ring represented by ##STR10## include aromatic ring (e.g., benzene, naphthalene, phenanthrene, anthracene), heterocyclic group preferably containing at least one of N, O and S atoms as a hetro atom (e.g., pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, thiophene, furane, pyran, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isooxazole, thianthrene, isobenzofurane, chromene, xanthene, phenoxathiin, indolidine, isoindole, indole, imidazole, quinolidine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pterindine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, pteridine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phenothiazine, phenoxazine, chroman, pyroline, pyrazoline, indoline, isoindoline), and cyclic alkene (e.g., cyclopentyl, cyclohexene). These rings may be condensed with other rings, such as those disclosed above.
Preferred among the rings represented by ##STR11## are benzene, naphthalene, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, quinoline, and quinoxaline. Particularly preferred among these rings is benzene.
The ring represented by ##STR12## may contain at least one substituent disclosed for R1.
L1 is preferably a C1-4 alkylene group, C6-12 arylene group or a group containing a combination thereof, more preferably methylene group or ethylene group, particularly methylene group.
A1 represents a carboxyl group, phosphono group, sulfo group or hydroxyl group. The hydrogen atom in the acidic group represented by A1 may be substituted with an alkali metal atom such as Na and K. A1 is preferably a carboxyl or hydroxyl group, particularly carboxyl group.
R11, R12, R13 and R14 may be the same or different and each independently represents a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group (preferably an alkyl group). The total carbon number of these groups is preferably 1 to 13. The alkyl groups represented by R11 to R14 may be substituted by substituents as set forth with reference to R1. R11, R12 R13 and R14 each is preferably a hydrogen atom.
Ra, Rb and Rc may be the same or different and each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (preferably an alkyl group) or an aromatic group (preferably an aryl group).
The alkyl group represented by Ra, Rb or Rc may be straight-chain, branched or cyclic and preferably contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Preferred examples of such an alkyl group include methyl group and ethyl group. The aryl group represented by Ra, Rb or Rc preferably contains 6 to 10 carbon atoms and is more preferably a phenyl group.
The alkyl or aryl group represented by Ra, Rb or Rc may be substituted by substituents as set forth with reference to R1. Preferred examples of such substituents include a carboxyl group, a phosphono group, a sulfo group, a hydroxyl group and substituted groups thereof (acidic group only) with an alkali metal atom (e.g., Na and K). More preferred among these substituents are carboxyl group and hydroxyl group. Particularly preferred among these substituents is carboxyl group. Ra, Rb and Rc may be connected to each other to form a ring (Ra and Rb or Ra and Rc).
The suffix t and each represents an integer 0 or 1. At least one of t and u is preferably 1. Particularly, t and u both represents 1.
The compound which can be more preferably used in the present invention is a compound represented by the general formula (V): ##STR13## wherein Z, A1, L1, R11, R12, R13, R14, Rb, Rc, t, and u are as defined in the general formula (IV); L2 has the same meaning as L1 in the general formula (IV); and A2 has the same meaning as A1 in the general formula (IV).
More preferred compounds are those represented by the general formula (VI): ##STR14## wherein Z, A1, L1, R11, R12, R13, R14, t, and u are as defined in the general formula (IV); L2, L3 and L4 each has the same meaning as L1 in the general formula (IV); and A2, A3 and A4 has the same meaning as A1 in the general formula (IV).
Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (I) will be set forth below, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto. ##STR15##
The synthesis of the compound represented by the general formula (I) can be accomplished on the basis of the description in Kagehira Ueno, Chelate Chemistry, Vol. 5, Nankodo, 1975, Chapter 5.
Specific examples of the synthesis of typical compounds of the present invention will be set forth below:
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 1 Synthesis of Compound 3 ##STR16## SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 1-(1) Synthesis of Compound 3a
100 g (0.80 mol) of cis-1,4-dichloro-2-butene and 350 g (1.89 mol) of the potassium salt of phthalimide were dissolved in 1.5 of dimethyl formamide. The solution was then heated to a temperature of 80° C. with stirring for 2 hours. 2 l of water was added to the material. The material was further stirred for 20 minutes. The resulting solid was filtered off, washed with water, and then dried with air to obtain 268 g (0.775 mol) of the desired compound 3a. (Yield: 97%)
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 1-(2) Synthesis of Compound 3b
258 g (0.746 mol) of Compound 3a obtained in Synthesis Example 1-(1) and 93.1 g (1.86 mol) of hydrazine monohydrate were dissolved in 1 l of methanol. The reaction system was then heated under reflux for 3 hours. The resulting solid was removed by filtration. The filtrate was then concentrated under reduced pressure. 200 ml (2.33 mol) of concentrated hydrochloric acid was added to the material. 500 ml of acetonitrile was then added to the material with stirring at room temperature. The resulting solid was filtered off, washed with acetonitrile, and then dried to obtain 113 g (0.711 mol) of the desired compound 3b. (Yield: 95%)
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 1-(3) Synthesis of Compound 3
45.5 g (0.286 mol) of Compound 3b obtained in Synthesis Example 1-(2) was dissolved in 100 ml of water. 22.9 g (0.573 mol) of sodium hydroxide was then added to the solution. 200 ml of an aqueous solution of 140 g (1.20 mol) of sodium chloroacetate and 100 ml of an aqueous solution of 48.0 g (1.20 mol) of sodium hydroxide were graudally added to the reaction system. During this process, the reaction temperature was kept at 50° to 55° C. A small amount of phenolphthalein was added to the reaction system as pH indicator to keep the reaction system light red. The reaction system was further heated with stirring for 1 hour, and then allowed to cool. 122 g (1.20 mol) of concentrated hydrochloric acid was added to the system. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure to about one third of the original volume. The resulting salts were filtered by filtration. The filtrate was cooled over night (about 5° C.). The resulting solid was filtered off, and then recrystallized from a mixture of water and methanol to obtain 42.0 g (0.132 mol) of the desired compound 3. (Yield: 46%; m.p. 179°-180° C. (decomposition))
SYNSTHESIS EXAMPLE 2 Synthesis of Compound 51 ##STR17## SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 2-(1) Synthesis of Compound 51a
134 g (0.507 mol) of a,a'-dibromo-oxylene and 210 g (1.13 mol) of the potassium salt of phthalimide were dissolved in 1.5 l of dimethyl formamide. The solution was then heated to a temperature of 80° C. with stirring for 2 hours. 2 l of water was added to the material. The material was further stirred for 20 minutes. The resulting solid was filtered off, washed with water, and then dried with air to obtain 191 g (0.482 mol) of the desired compound 51a. (Yield: 95%)
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 2-(2) Synthesis of Compound 51b
173 g (0.436 mol) of Compound 51a obtained in Synthesis Example 2-(1) and 60.0 g (1.20 mol) of hydrazine monohydrate were dissolved in 1 l of methanol. The reaction system was then heated under reflux for 3 hours. The resulting solid was removed by filtration. The filtrate was then concentrated under reduced pressure. 122 g (1.20 mol) of concentrated hydrochloric acid was added to the material. 500 ml of acetonitrile was then added to the material with stirring at room temperature. The resulting solid was filtered off, washed with acetonitrile, and then dried to obtain 169 g (0.809 mol) of the desired compound 51b. (Yield: 95%)
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 2-(3) Synthesis of Compound 51
59.9 g (0.286 mol) of Compound 51b obtained in Synthesis Example 2-(2) was dissolved in 100 ml of water. 22.9 g (0.573 mol) of sodium hydroxide was then added to the solution. 200 ml of an aqueous solution of 140 g (1.20 mol) of sodium chloroacetate and 100 ml of an aqueous solution of 48.0 g (1.20 mol) of sodium hydroxide were graudally added to the reaction system. During this process, the reaction temperature was kept at 50° to 55° C. A small amount of phenolphthalein was added to the reaction system as a pH indicator to keep the reaction system light red. The reaction system was further heated with stirring for 1 hour, and then allowed to cool. 122 g (1.20 mol) of concentrated hydrochloric acid was added to the system. The resulting solid was filtered off, dissolved in 600 ml of an aqueous solution of 45.6 g (1.14 mol) of sodium hydroxide, and then filtered. 116 g (1.14 mol) of concentrated hydrochloric acid was added to the filtrate. The resulting white crystal was filtered off, thoroughly washed with water, and then dried by airation to obtain 75.1 g (0.204 mol) of the desired compound 51. (Yield: 71%; m.p. 247°-249° C. (decomposition))
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 3 Synthesis of Compound 95 ##STR18## SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 3-(1) Synthesis of Compound 95b
12.7 g (9.91×10-2 mol) of imidazole-4,5-dimethanol) (Compound 95a) was suspended in 100 ml of dichloromethane. The suspension was cooled to lower than 5° C., and 47.2 g (3.97×10-1 mol) of thionylchloride was added thereto dropwise. After allowing to stand at room temperature for one night, the product was concentrated under reduced pressure. The concentrated product was washed with dichloromethane and then dried to obtain 16.0 g (9.70×10-2 mol) of white-yellow solid of Compound 95b. (Yield: 98%)
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 3-(2) Synthesis of Compound 95c
16.0 g (9.70×10-2 mol) of Compound 95b obtained in SYNTHESYS EXAMPLE 3-(1), 64.7 (3.27×10-1 mol) of iminodiacetic acid dimethyl hydrochlride, and 200 g (1.45 mol) potassium carbonate were suspended in a mixture of 1 l acetnitrile and 100 ml of dimethylformamide. The suspension was heated under reflux for 4 hours. The reaction product was filtered, and the filtrate was concentrated. The concentrated product was purified by silica gel chromatography (developer: methanol/dichloromethane=1/10 (vol/vol)) to obtain 21.0 g (5.07×10-2 mol) of sticky oily product of Compound 95c. (Yield: 52%)
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 3-(3) Synthesis of Compound 95
6.80 g (1.64×10-2 mol) of Compound 95 obtained in SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 3-(2) was dissolved in 80 ml of an aqueous solution of 14.1 g (0.353 mol) of sodium hydroxide. The solution thus obtained was allowed to react for two hours at room temperature. The reaction mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure. Methanol was added to the mixture. The resulting solid was filtered off, and then recrystallized from a mixture of water, methanol and ethanol to obtain 3.2 (7.17×10-3 mol) of white solid of dihydrate of Compound 95. (Yield: 44%; m.p. 253°-255° C. (decomposition)
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 4 Synthesis Compound 96 ##STR19## SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 4-(1) Synthesis of Compound 96b
100 g (0.588 mol) of 2-isopropylimidazole-4,5-dimethanol (Compound 96a) was suspended in 500 ml of dichloromethane. The solution obtained was cooled to lower than 5° C., and 280 g (2.35 mol) of thionylchloride was added thereto dropwise. Then in the same manner as SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 3-(1), 117 g (0.565 mol) of white-yellow solid of Compound 96b was obtained. (Yield 96%)
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 4-(2) Synthesis of Compound 96c
8.9 g (4.30×10-2 mol) of Compound 96b obtained in SYSNTHESIS EXAMPLE 4-(1), 18.8 g (9.51×10-2 mol) of iminodiacetic acid dimethyl hydrochloride, and 100 g (7.24×10-1 mol) of potassium carbonate was suspended in 500 ml of acetnitrile. Then in the same manner as SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 3-(2), 5.1 g (1.12×10-2 mol) of sticky oily product of Compound 96c was obtained. (Yield 26%)
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 4-(3) Synthesis of Compound 96
5.0 g (1.09×10-2 mol) of Compound 96c obtained in SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 4-(2) was dissolved in 30 ml of an aqueous solution of 9.40 g (0.235 mol) of sodium hydroxide. After then in the same manner as in SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 3-(3), 2.40 g (4.28×10-3 mol) of white solid of tetrahydrate of Compound 96 was obtained. (Yield 39%; m.p. 250°-253° C. (decomposition))
Metal salts which constitute the metal chelate compound of the present invention are selected from the group consisting of salts of Fe(III), Mn(III), Co(III), Rh(II), Rh(III), Au(II), Au(III) and Ce(IV). Preferred among these metals are Fe(III), Mn(III), and Ce(IV). Particularly preferred among these metals is Fe(III).
Anions or cations which form these metal salts are preferably SO4 --, Cl-, NO3 -, NH4 + or PO4 -. It is preferable that an ion(s) is selected so that it form a water soluble chelate compound.
As the metal chelate compound for use in the present invention may be isolated as metal chelate compound. However, the chelate compound is not necessary to be isolated. In practical use, it is convenient from the point of view of easy handling, to directly use a chelate forming reaction product of the compound represented by general formula (I) and the metal salt.
Two or more kinds of metal chelate compounds of the present invention can be used in combination.
It goes without saying that the compound represented by the general formula (I) and the above mentioned metal salt such as ferric sulfate, ferric chloride, ferric nitrate, ferric ammonium sulfate and ferric phosphate can be reacted with each other in a solution in the present invention. The compound represented by the general formula (I) may be used in a molar ratio of 1.0 or more based on metal ion. If the stability of the metal chelate compound is low, this ratio is preferably high. In general, this ratio is in the range of 1 to 30.
A preferred concentration of the metal ion is 0.05 to 1 mol/l. The reaction temperature is preferably 5° to 80° C. and more preferably 15° to 45° C.
Specific examples of compounds to be used as the metal chelate compounds of the present invention are set forth below, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto. ##STR20##
A specific example of synthesis of typical metal chelate compound of the present invention will be set forth below.
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 5 Synthesis of Compound K-3
12.1 g (0.03 mol) of ferric nitrate nonahydrate and 10.5 g (0.033 mol) of Compound 3 were dissolved in 100 ml water under heating. The pH of the solution was adjusted with an aqueous ammonia and acetic acid to 5. Water in the solution was gradually evaporated at room temperature until the amount of the solution become 30 ml. The resulted solid was filtered off, washed with cooled water, and dried under reduced pressure to obtain 6.1 g (0.016 mol) of yellow-green solid of Compound K-3. (Yield: 53%; m.p. higher than 240° C. (decomposition))
Elementary Analysis:
______________________________________                                    
           H         C      N                                             
______________________________________                                    
Calculated (%)                                                            
             4.67        37.13  10.83                                     
Measured (%) 4.52        36.98  10.79                                     
______________________________________
SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 6 Synthesis of Compound K-51
4.04 g (0.010 mol) of ferric nitrate nonahydrate and 4.05 g (0.011 mol) of Compound 51 were dissolved in 100 ml water under heating. The pH of the solution was adjusted with an aqueous ammonia and acetic acid to 5. Water in the solution was gradually evaporated at room temperature until the amount of the solution become 10 ml. The resulted solid was filtered off, washed with cooled water, and dried under reduced pressure to obtain 2.94 g (6.71×10-3 mol) of yellow solid of Compound K-51. (Yield: 67%; m.p. higher than 270° C. (decomposition))
Elementary Analysis:
______________________________________                                    
           H         C      N                                             
______________________________________                                    
Calculated (%)                                                            
             4.60        43.86  9.59                                      
Measured (%) 4.63        43.96  9.70                                      
______________________________________
The metal chelate compound of the present invention may be incorporated in the fixing solution or an interbath (e.g., bleach acceleration bath) provided between color development process and desilvering process in a small amount. The metal chelate compound of the present invention can be incorporated in the bleaching solution or blix solution in an amount of 0.05 to 1 mol/l to effectively serve as a bleaching agent.
Preferred embodiments of processing solution having a bleaching power (general term for bleaching solution or blix solution) will be described hereinafter. As mentioned above, the metal chelate compound of the present invention can be incorporated in the processing solution having a bleaching capacity in an amount of 0.05 to 1 mol/l to effectively serve as bleaching agent. More preferably, the metal chelate compound of the present invention can be incorporated in the processing solution having a bleaching power in an amount of 0.1 to 0.5 mol/l.
In other embodiments of the present invention, the processing solution having a bleaching power may preferably contain an organic acid in addition to the above mentioned metal chelate compound. The acid is preferably used for controlling the pH of the processing solution.
Preferred examples of the organic acid to be used in the present invention include a monobasic acid such as formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, monochloroacetic acid, monobromoacetic acid, monochloropropionic acid, lactic acid, pyruvic acid, acrylic acid, butyric acid, isobutyric acid, pivalic acid, aminoacetic acid, valeric acid, isovaleric acid, benzoic acid, chloro and hydroxy mono-substituted benzoic acid, and nicotinic acid, amino acid compound such as asparagine, aspartic acid, alanine, arginine, ethionine, glycine, glutamine, cystein, serine, methionine, and leucine, dibasic acid such as oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, tartaric acid, malic acid, oxaloacetic acid, phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, and terephthalic acid, tribasic acid such as citric acid, sulfonic acid, sulfinic acid, imide, and aromatic sulfonamide (which are able to be decomposed to form acids), levulinic acid and ureidopropionic acid. The present invention should not be construed as being limited to these exemplary compounds. The acids may be present in the composition as water soluble salts.
In the present invention, among these organic acids, those having a pKa value of 1.5 to 6.5 may be preferably used. More preferably, organic acids with a pKa value of 2.0 to 5.5 and containing carboxyl group may be used. Particularly preferred among these organic acids are monobasic acids. Most preferred among these monobasic acids are acetic acid and/or glycolic acid.
In the present invention, the amount of such an organic acid to be used is preferably 0 to 3.0 mol, more preferably 0.05 or more and not more than to 2.0 mol per l of processing solution having a bleaching power or its replenisher.
Two or more of these organic acids may be used in admixture. In stead of these organic acids, their salts may be used in combination with inorganic acids.
When the metal chelate compound of the present invention is used as bleaching agent to be incorporated in the processing solution having a bleaching capacity, it may be used in combination with other bleaching agents so far as the effects of the present invention can be attained. The amount of the other bleaching agent is preferably 1/10 to 10 mol per mol of the metal chelate compound. Examples of such bleaching agents include bleaching agents of Fe(III), Co(III) or Mn(III) chelates of the compounds set forth below, peroxodisulfate, hydrogen peroxide, and bromate.
Examples of compounds which constitute the above mentioned chelate bleaching agents include ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate, diammonium ethylenediaminetetraacetate, tetra(trimethylammonium) ethylenediaminetetraacetate, tetrapotassium ethylenediaminetetraacetate, tetrasodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate, trisodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, pentasodium diethylenetriaminepentaacetate, ethylenediamine-N-(β-oxyethyl)-N,N',N'-triacetic acid, trisodium ethylenediamine-N-(β-oxyethyl)-N,N',N'-triacetate, triammonium ethylenediamine-N-(β-oxyethyl)-N,N',N'-triacetate, 1,2-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid, disodium 1,2-diaminopropanetetraacetate, 1,3-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid, diammonium 1,3-diaminopropanetetraacetate, nitrilotriacetic acid, trisodium nitrotriacetate, cyclohexanediaminetetraacetic acid, disodium cyclohexanediaminetetraacetate, iminodiacetic acid, dihydroxyethyl glycine, ethyletherdiaminetetraacetic acid, glycoletherdiaminetetraacetic acid, ethylenediaminetetrapropionic acid, phenylenediaminetetraacetic acid, 1,3-diaminopropanol-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenephosphonic acid, ethylenediamine-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenephosphonic acid, and 1,3-propylenediamine-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenephosphonic acid. The present invention should not be construed as being limited to these exemplary compounds.
The processing solution having a bleaching power containing the present metal chelate compound may preferably comprise a halide such as chloride, bromide or iodide as a rehalogenating agent for accelerating oxidation of silver in addition to the metal chelate compound and the above mentioned organic acid. The amount of the rehalogenating agent is generally in the range of 0.01 to 2.0 mol/l. In place of such a halide, an organic ligand which forms a difficultly soluble silver salt may be incorporated in the processing solution. The halide may be incorporated in the processing solution in the form of an alkaline metal salt, ammonium salt, guanidine salt or amine salt. Specific examples of such salts include sodium bromide, ammonium bromide, potassium chloride, and guanidine chloride. Preferred among these salts is ammonium bromide. The amount of the rehalogenating agent to be incorporated in the bleaching solution is in the range of 0.1 to 2.0 ml/l, preferably 0.3 to 1.5 mol/l.
The blix solution containing the present metal chelate compound or the metal an organic acid may comprise a fixing agent as described later and optionally the above mentioned rehalogenating agent, in addition to the metal chelate compound. The amount of the rehalogenating agent to be incorporated in the blix solution is in the range of 0.001 to 2.0 mol/l, preferably 0.01 to 1.0 mol/l.
The bleaching solution or blix solution of the present invention may further comprise a bleach accelerator, a corrosion inhibitor for inhibiting the corrosion of the processing bath, a buffer for maintaining the processing solution at a desired pH range, a fluorescent brightening agent, an antifoaming agent or the like if desired.
As such a bleach accelerator there can be used a compound containing a mercapto group or disulfide group as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,893,858 and 1,138,842, German Patent 1,290,812, JP-A-53-95630 (the term "JP-A" as used herein means an "unexamined published Japanese patent application"), and Research Disclosure No. 17129 (1978), the thiazoline derivative as disclosed in JP-A-50-140129, the thiourea derivatives as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,706,561, the polyethylene oxide as disclosed in German Patent 2,748,430, the polyamine compound as disclosed in JP-B-45-8836 (the term "JP-B" as used herein means an "examined Japanese patent publication"), the imidazole compound as disclosed in JP-A-49-40493, or the like. Particularly preferred among these compounds is the mercapto compound as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 1,138,842.
As corrosion inhibitor there may be preferably used nitrate such as ammonium nitrate and potassium nitrate. The amount of the nitrate to be incorporated in the processing solution is in the range of 0.05 to 0.5 mol/l, preferably 0.01 to 2.0 mol/l, more preferably 0.05 to 0.5 mol/l.
The pH value of the bleaching solution or blix solution of the present invention is in the range of 2.0 to 8.0, preferably 3.0 to 7.5. If the color development step is immediately followed by bleach or blix step, the processing solution is preferably used at a pH range of 6.0 or less, more preferably 5.5 or less, in order to inhibit bleach fogging. If the pH value of the processing solution falls below 2.0, the metal chelate according to the present invention becomes unstable. Therefore, the pH value of the processing solution is preferably in the range of 2.0 to 5.5.
In order to adjust the pH value of the processing solution having a bleaching capacity to the above mentioned range, the above mentioned organic acid can be used in combination with an alkaline agent (e.g., aqueous ammonia, KOH, NaOH, imidazole, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine). Particularly preferred among these alkaline agents is aqueous ammonia.
In the processing step, the processing solution containing complex salt of iron (III) and having a bleaching power which has been used is preferably aerated to oxidize the resulting ferrous complex. This regenerates the bleaching agent, keeping the photographic properties extremely stable.
The bleach or blix step may be effected generally at a temperature of 30° to 50° C., preferably 35° to 45° C. For light-sensitive materials for picture taking, the bleaching or blix time generally ranges from 10 seconds to 5 minutes, preferably from 10 seconds to 60 seconds, more preferably from 10 seconds to 30 seconds. For light-sensitive materials for printing, the bleaching time generally ranges from 5 seconds to 70 seconds, preferably 5 seconds to 50 seconds, more preferably 5 seconds to 30 seconds, and particularly preferably 5 seconds to 15 seconds. Under these preferred processing conditions, excellent results, for example, rapid processing and no increase in stain can be provided.
The fixing solution or blix solution may comprise a fixing agent. Examples of such a fixing agent include a thiosulfate, a thiocyanate, a thioether, an amine, a mercapto, a thione, a thiourea, and an iodide. Specific examples of these compounds include ammonium thiosulfate, sodium thiosulfate, potassium thiosulfate, guanidine thiosulfate, potassium thiocyanate, dihydroxyethyl-thioether, 3,6-dithia-1,8-octanediol, and imidazole. Among these compounds, thiosulfate, especially ammonium thiosulfate may be preferably used for rapid fixing. Further, two or more kinds of fixing agents can be used in combination for rapid fixing. For example, ammonium thiosulfate may be preferably used in combination with ammonium thiocyanate, imidazole, thiourea, thioether or the like. In this case, the secondary fixing agent may be used generally in an amount of 0.01 to 100 mol % based on ammonium thiosulfate.
The amount of the fixing agent to be incorporated in the fixing solution or blix solution is generally in the range of 0.1 to 3.0 mol/l, preferably 0.5 to 2.0 mol/l. The pH value of the fixing solution depends on the kind of the fixing agent contained therein and is normally in the range of 3.0 to 9.0. In particular, if a thiosulfate is used, the pH value of the fixing solution is preferably in the range of 6.5 to 8.0 for stable fixing properties.
The fixing solution and/or blix solution may comprise a preservative to enhance the aging stability thereof. The fixing solution or blix solution containing a thiosulfate may effectively comprise a sulfite and/or hydroxylamine, hydrazine or aldehyde-bisulfite adduct (e.g., acetaldehyde-bisulfite adduct, particularly aromatic aldehyde-bisulfite adduct as described in JP-A-1-298935) as a preservative. Further, sulfinic compounds as described in JP-A-62-143048 may be preferably used.
The fixing solution and/or blix solution may preferably comprise a buffer to keep the pH value thereof constant. Examples of such a buffer include a phosphate, an imidazole such as imidazole, 1-methylimidazole, 2-methylimidazole, and 1-ethylimidazole, triethanolamine, N-allylmorpholine, and N-benzoylpiperadine. The fixing solution may comprise various chelating agents to opacify iron ions brought by the bleaching solution to improve the stability thereof. Preferred examples of such chelating agents include 1-hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphonic acid, ethylenediamine-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenephosphonic acid, nitrilotrimethylenephosphonic acid, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, cyclohexanediaminetetraacetic acid, and 1,2-propanediaminetetraacetic acid.
The fixing step may be effected generally at a temperature of 30° to 50° C., preferably 35° to 45° C. For light-sensitive materials for picture taking, the fixing time generally ranges from 35 seconds to 2 minutes, preferably from 40 seconds to 100 seconds. For light-sensitive materials for printing, the fixing time ranges from 10 seconds to 70 secons, preferably 10 seconds to 30 seconds.
The desilvering step may consist of a bleach step and/or blix step in combination. Typical examples of such a combination include:
i. Bleach - fixing
ii. Bleach - blix
iii. Bleach - rinse - fixing
iv. Blix
v. Fixing - blix
vi. Fixing - blix - fix
Light-sensitive materials for picture taking may be preferably subjected to the combination i, ii, iii, or iv, more preferably i, ii or iii. Light-sensitive material for print may be preferably subjected to the combination v.
The present invention can be applied to any desilvering step which is effected after color development through the stop step, the rinse step or the like.
In the present desilvering step such as bleaching, blix and fixing, the agitation is preferably intensified as much as possible to more effectively accomplish the effects of the present invention.
In particular, the agitation can be intensified by various methods. For example, the processing solution may be jetted to the surface of the emulsion layer of the light-sensitive material as described in JP-A-62-183460 and 62-183461. The agitating effect can be improved by a rotary means as described in JP-A-62-183461. Furthermore, the agitating effect can be improved by moving the light-sensitive material with the emulsion surface in contact with a wiper blade provided in the bath so that a turbulence occurs on the emulsion surface. Moreover, the agitation can be intensified by increasing the total circulated amount of processing solution. Such an agitation improving method can be effectively applied to the bleaching bath, blix bath or fixing bath. The improvement in agitation effect expedites the supply of a bleaching agent, fixing agent or the like into the emulsion film, resulting in an improvement in desilvering rate.
The above mentioned agitation improving method is more effective when a bleach accelerator is used. In this case, the agitation improving method can remarkably enhance the bleach accelerating effect or eliminate the effect of inhibiting fixation by the bleach accelerator.
The above mentioned strong agitation may be used in the color development, rinse with water or stabilization.
The color developer used in the present color development may comprise a known aromatic primary amine color developing agent. Preferred examples of such an aromatic primary amine color developing agent include p-phenylenediamine derivatives. Specific examples of such p-phenylenediamine derivatives will be set forth below, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
D-1: N,N-diethyl-p-phenylenediamine
D-2: 4-Amino-N,N-diethyl-3-methylaniline
D-3: 4-Amino-N-(β-hydroxyethyl)-N-methylaniline
D-4: 4-Amino-N-ethyl-N-(β-hydroxyethyl)aniline
D-5: 4-Amino-N-ethyl-N-(β-hydroxyethyl)-3-methylaniline
D-6: 4-Amino-N-ethyl-N-(3-hydroxypropyl)-3-methylaniline
D-7: 4-Amino-N-ethyl-N-(4-hydroxybutyl)-3-methylaniline
D-8: 4-Amino-N-ethyl-N-(β-methanesulfonamideethyl)-3-methylaniline
D-9: 4-Amino-N,N-diethyl-3-(β-hydroxyethyl)aniline
D-10: 4-Amino-N-ethyl-N-(β-methoxyethyl)-3-methylaniline
D-11: 4-Amino-N-(β-ethoxyethyl)-3-N-ethyl-methylaniline
D-12: 4-Amino-N-(3-carbamoylpropyl-N-n-propyl-3-methylaniline
D-13: 4-Amino-N-(4-carbamoylbutyl-N-n-propyl-3-methylaniline
D-14: N-(4-amino-3-methylphenyl)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine
D-15: N-(4-amino-3-methylphenyl)-3-(hydroxymethyl) pyrrolidine
D-16: N-(4-amino-3-methylphenyl)-3-pyrrolidinecarboxamide
D-17: 4-Amino-N-ethyl-N-(β-hydroxyethyl)-3-methoxyaniline
Particularly preferred among these p-phenylenediamine derivatives are Exemplary Compounds D-5, D-6, D-7, D-8, D-12, and D-17.
These p-phenylenediamine derivatives may be used in the form of salt such as a sulfate, a hydrochloride, a sulfite and a p-toluenesulfonate. The amount of the aromatic primary amine color developing agent to be used is generally in the range of 0.0002 to 0.2 mol, more preferably about 0.001 to 0.1 mol, more preferably 0.01 to 0.06 per l of color developer.
If necessary, the color developer may comprise as preservative a sulfite such as sodium sulfite, potassium sulfite, sodium bisulfite, potassium bisulfite, sodium metasulfite and potassium metasulfite or a carbonyl-sulfurous acid addition product.
Furthermore, the color developer may preferably comprise as a compound for directly preserving the aromatic primary amine color developing agent various hydroxylamines as disclosed in JP-A-63-5341 and 63-106655, preferably those containing sulfo group or carboxyl group, hydroxamic acids as described in JP-A-63-43138, hydrazines and hydrazides as described in JP-A-63-146041, phenols as described in JP-A-63-44657 and 63-58443, α-hydroxyketones and α-aminoketones as described in JP-A-63-44656, and/or various saccharides as described in JP-A-63-36244. These compounds may be preferably used in combination with monoamines as described in JP-A-63-4235, JP-A-63-24254, JP-A-63-21647, JP-A-63-146040, JP-A-63-27841, and JP-A-63-25654, diamines as described in JP-A-63-30845, 63-14640, and 63-43139, polyamines as described in JP-A-63-21647, and 63-26655, polyamines as described in JP-A-63-44655, nitroxy radicals as described in JP-A-63-53551, alcohols as described in JP-A-63-43140 and JP-A-63-53549, oxims as described in JP-A-63-56654, and tertiary amines as described in JP-A-63-239447.
Other examples of preservatives which can be incorporated in the color developer if desired include various metals as described in JP-A-57-44148 and 57-3749, salicylic acids as described in JP-A-59-180588, alkanolamines as described in JP-A-54-3582, polyethyleneimines as described in JP-A-56-94349, and aromatic polyhydroxy compounds as described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,746,544. In particular, aromatic polyhydroxy compounds may be preferably used.
The amount of such a preservative to be incorporated in the color developer is generally in the range of 0.005 to 0.2 mol/l, preferably 0.01 to 0.05 mol/l.
The color developer to be used in the present invention preferably has a pH value of 9 to 12, more preferably 9.5 to 11.5. The color developer may further comprise compounds which have been known to constitute color developers.
In order to maintain the above specified pH range, various buffers may be preferably used.
Specific examples of such buffers include sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, trisodium phosphate, tripotassium phosphate, disodium phosphate, dipotassium phosphate, sodium borate, potassium borate, sodium terraborate (borax), potassium tetraborate, sodium o-hydroxybenzoate (sodium salicylate), potassium o-hydroxybenzoate, sodium 5-sulfo-2-hydroxybenzoate (sodium 5-sulfosalicylate), and potassium 5-sulfo-2-hydroxybenzoate (potassium 5-sulfosalicylate). However, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to these compounds.
The amount of the buffer to be incorporated in the color developer is preferably in the range of 0.1 mol/l or more, particularly 0.1 to 0.4 mol/l.
The color developer may further comprise various chelating agents as a precipitation inhibiting agent for calcium or magnesium or to improve the stability of the color developer.
As such chelating agents there can be preferably used organic acid compounds. Examples of such organic acid compounds include aminopolycarboxylic acids, organic phosphonic acids, and phosphonocarboxylic acids. Specific examples of such organic acid compounds include nitrilotriacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, N,N,N-trimethylenephosphonic acid, ethylenediamine-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenephosphonic acid, transcyclohexanediaminetetraacetic acid, 1,2-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid, hydroxyethyliminodiacetic acid, glycoletherdiaminetetraacetic acid, ethylenediamineorthohydroxyphenylacetic acid, 2-phosphonobutane-1,2,4-tricarboxylic acid, 1-hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphonic acid, and N,N'-bis(2-hydroxybenzyl)ethylenediamine-N,N'-diacetic acid.
Two or more such chelating agents can be used in combination if desired.
The proper amount of such a chelating agent to be incorporated in the color developer is such that it suffices to block metallic ions in the color developer, e.g., 0.001 to 0.05 mol/l, preferably 0.003 to 0.02 mol/l.
The color developer may optionally comprise any development accelerators.
Examples of development accelerators which can be incorporated in the color developer include thioether compounds as disclosed in JP-B-37-16088, JP-B-37-5987, JP-B-38-7826, JP-B-44-12380, and JP-B-45-9019, and U.S. Pat. No. 3,818,247, p-phenylenediamine compounds as disclosed in JP-A-52-49829 and JP-A-50-15554, quaternary ammonium salts as disclosed in JP-A-50-137726, JP-A-56-156826 and JP-A-52-43429, and JP-B-44-30074, amine compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,494,903, 3,128,182, 4,230,796, 3,253,919, 2,482,546, 2,596,926 and 3,582,346 and JP-B-41-11431, polyalkylene oxides as disclosed in JP-B-37-16088, JP-B-42-25201, JP-B-41-11431, and JP-B-42-23883, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,128,183, and 3,532,501, and imidazoles such as 2-methylimidazole and imidazole.
As auxiliary developing agents there can be used 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidones for rapid development. Examples of such auxiliary developing agents include compounds as set forth below: ##STR21##
The amount of such an auxiliary developing agent to be incorporated in the color developer is normally in the range of 0.0005 to 0.03 mol/l, preferably 0.001 to 0.01 mol/l.
The color developer to be used in the present invention can comprise any fog inhibitors as necessary. As such fog inhibitors there can be used a halide of alkaline metal such as sodium chloride, potassium bromide and potassium iodide or organic fog inhibitor. Typical examples of such an organic fog inhibitor include nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds such as benzotriazole, 6-nitrobenzimidazole, 5-nitroisoindazole, 5-methylbenzotriazole, 5-nitrobenzotriazole, 5-chlorobenzotriazole, 2-thiazolylbenzimidazole, 2-thiazolylmethylbenzimidazole, indazole, hydroxyazaindolidine, and adenine.
The color developer to be used in the present invention may comprise a fluorescent brightening agent. As such a fluorescent brightening agent there can be preferably used 4,4'-diamino-2,2'-disulfostilbene compound. The amount of such a fluorescent brightening agent to be incorporated in the color developer is generally in the range of 0 to 5 g/l, preferably 0.1 to 4 g/l.
The color developer to be used in the present invention may comprise various surface active agents such as alkylsulfonic acid, arylsulfonic acid, aliphatic carboxylic acid and aromatic carboxylic acid if desired.
The temperature at which the present processing is effected with the color developer is generally in the range of 20° to 55° C., preferably 30° to 55° C. The time during which the present processing is effected with the color developer is generally in the range of 20 seconds to 5 minutes, preferably 30 seconds to 200 seconds, more preferably 60 seconds to 150 seconds.
The present processing method can also be applied to color reversal processing. The black-and-white developer to be used in the color reversal processing is a 1st black-and-white developer to be used in the reversal processing of commonly known color light-sensitive materials. Well known various additives which have been incorporated in black-and-white developers which have been widely used for processing solutions for black-and-white silver halide photographic materials can be incorporated in the 1st black-and-white developer for color reversal light-sensitive materials.
Typical examples of such additives include developing agents such as 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone, methol and hydroquinone, preservatives such as sulfite, accelerators comprising alkali such as sodium hydroxide, sodium carbonate and potassium carbonate, inorganic or organic inhibitors such as potassium bromide, 2-methylbenzimidazole and methylbenzthiazole, water softners such as polyphosphoric acid, and development inhibitors comprising iodides (in a slight amount) or mercapto compound.
The present processing process essentially consists of the above mentioned color development step and the subsequent desilvering step, preferably followed by rinse step and/or stabilizing step.
The rinsing water to be used in the rinsing step can comprise various surface active agents to inhibit unevennes due to waterdrop at the time of drying the light-sensitive material after processing. Examples of these surface active agents include polyethylene glycol type nonionic surface active agents, polyvalent alcohol type nonionic surface active agents, alkylbenzenesulfonate type anionic surface active agents, higher alcohol sulfuric ester type anionic surface active agents, alkylnaphthalene sulfonate type anionic surface active agents, quaternary ammonium salt type cationic surface active agents, amine salt type cationic surface active agents, amino acid type amphoteric surface active agents, and betaine type amphoteric surface active agents. However, ionic surface active agents can react with various ions introduced into the system upon processing to form insoluble substances. Therefore, nonionic surface active agents may be preferably used. In particular, alkylphenol-ethylene oxide adducts may be preferably used. Particularly preferred examples of such alkylphenols include octyl, nonyl, dodecyl, and dinonylphenol. The molar amount of ethylene oxide to be added is preferably 8 to 14. In addition, silicone surface active agents, which exhibit a high antifoaming effect, may be preferably used.
The rinsing solution may contain various anti-bacterial agents and anti-fungal agents to inhibit the formation of fur and the proliferation of mold on the light-sensitive material which has been processed. Examples of these anti-bacterial agents and anti-fungal agents include thiazolylbenzimidazole compounds as disclosed in JP-A-57-157244 and 58-105145, isothiazolone compounds as disclosed in JP-A-54-27424 and 57-8542, chlorophenolic compounds such as trichlorophenol, bromophenolic compounds, organic tin or zinc compounds, thiocyanic or isothiocyanic compounds, acid amide compounds, diazine or triazine compounds, thiourea compounds, benzotriazolealkyl guanidine compounds, quaternary ammonium salts such as benzammonium chloride, antibiotics such as penicilline, and general-purpose anti-fungal agents as described in Journal of Antibacterial and Antifungal Agents", Vol. 1, No. 5, p 207-223 (1983). Two or more of these antibacterial or antifungal agents can be used in combination.
Various germicides as described in JP-A-48-83820 can be used.
Various chelating agents may be preferably incorporated in the system.
Preferred examples of these chelating agents include aminopolycarboxylic acid such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid and diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, organic phosphonic acid such as 1-hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphonic acid and ethylenediamine-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenephosphonic acid, and hydrolyzates of anhydrous maleic polymers as described in European Patent 345172A1.
Preservatives which can be incorporated in the above mentioned fixing solution or blix solution may be preferably incorporated in the rinsing solution.
As the stabilizing solution to be used in the stabilizing step there can be used a processing solution for stabilizing dye images. Examples of such a processing solution include solution preferably with a pH value of 3 to 6 having a buffering capability, and solution containing an aldehyde (e.g., formalin, glutaraldehyde), hexamethylenetetramine compound, hexahydrotriazine compound or N-methylol compound disclosed in JP-A-2-153348 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,859,574. The stabilizing solution may contain all compounds which can be incorporated in the rinsing solution. The stabilizing solution may optionally further contain an ammonium compound such as ammonium chloride and ammonium sulfite, metallic compound such as Bi and Al, fluorescent brightening agent, various dye stabilizers such as N-methylol compound as described in JP-A-2-153350 and JP-A-2-153348, and U.S. Pat. No. 4,859,574, film hardener, and alkanolamine as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,786,581. A stabilization method using the above mentioned dye stabilizers may also be used.
The rinsing step or stabilizing step is preferably effected in a multistage countercurrent process. The number of stages is preferably 2 to 4. The replenishment rate of the rinsing solution or stabilizing solution is generally 1 to 50 times, preferably 2 to 30 times, more preferably 2 to 15 times the amount of the solution to be brought over from the preceding bath per unit area.
As water to be used in the rinsing step or stabilizing step there may be preferably used tap water, water obtained by deionizing water with an ion exchange resin so that Ca and Mg concentrations are each reduced to 5 mg/l or less, and water sterilized by halogen, ultraviolet ray, etc.
As water for making up for the evaporation loss there may be used tap water, preferably the above mentioned deionized or sterilized water which can be preferably used in the the rinsing step or stabilizing step.
In the present invention, in order to correct for the concentration due to evaporation in the bleaching solution and blix solution as well as other processing solutions, a proper amount of water or correcting solution or processing replenisher may be preferably supplied into the system.
The overflow solution from the rinsing step or stabilizing step can be flown into a preceding bath having a fixing capability to reduce the amount of the processing solution to be discharged.
The processing method of the present invention may be preferably effected by means of an automatic developing machine. Conveying methods in such an automatic developing machine are described in JP-A-60-191257, JP-A-60-191258, and JP-A-60-191259. In order to speed up the processing, the crossover time between processing baths in the automatic developing machine is preferably minimized. An automatic developing machine with a crossover time of 10 seconds or less is described in JP-A-1-319038.
When a continuous processing is effected by means of an automatic developing machine in accordance with the processing method of the present invention, a replenisher may be preferably supplied into the system depending on the amount of the light-sensitive material which has been processed in order to make up for the consumption of components of the processing solution accompanied by the processing of the light-sensitive material or inhibit the accummulation of undesired components eluted from the light-sensitive material in the processing solution. Further, two or more procesing baths may be provided in each processing step. In this case, a countercurrent process may be preferably used wherein a replenisher flows from one bath to its preceding bath. In particular, the rinse step and the stabilizing step may be preferably effected in a 2- to 4-stage cascade system.
The amount of the replenisher to be supplied may be preferably reduced so far as the change in the composition of each processing solution doesn't cause any deterioration of photographic properties or other troubles such as solution contamination.
For color light-sensitive materials for picture taking, the amount of the color developer replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 100 ml to 1,500 ml, preferably 100 ml to 1,000 ml per m2 of light-sensitive material. For color light-sensitive materials for print, the amount of the color developer replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 20 ml to 500 ml, preferably 30 ml to 200 ml per m2 of light-sensitive material.
For color light-sensitive materials for picture taking, the amount of the bleaching solution replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 10 ml to 500 ml, preferably 10 ml to 160 ml per m2 of light-sensitive material. For color light-sensitive materials for print, the amount of the bleaching solution replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 20 ml to 300 ml, preferably 50 ml to 150 ml per m2 of light-sensitive material.
For color light-sensitive materials for picture taking, the amount of the blix solution replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 100 ml to 3,000 ml, preferably 200 ml to 1,300 ml per m2 of light-sensitive material. For color light-sensitive materials for print, the amount of the blix solution replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 20 ml to 300 ml, preferably 50 ml to 200 ml per m2 of light-sensitive material. The blix solution replenisher may be supplied as monobath or separately as bleaching composition and fixing composition. Alternatively, the overflow solution from the bleaching bath and/or the fixing bath may be mixed to provide a blix solution replenisher.
For color light-sensitive materials for picture taking, the amount of the fixing solution replenisher to be supplied is generally in the range of 300 ml to 3,000 ml, preferably 300 ml to 1,000 ml per m2 of light-sensitive material. For color light-sensitive materials for print, the amount of the fixing solution replenisher to be supplied is in the range of 20 ml to 300 ml, preferably 50 ml to 200 ml per m2 of light-sensitive material.
The replenishment rate of the rinsing solution or stabilizing solution is generally 1 to 50 times, preferably 2 to 30 times, more preferably 2 to 15 times the amount of the solution to be brought over from the preceding bath per unit area.
In order to further reduce the replenishment rate for environmental protection, various regeneration methods may be preferably used in combination. The regeneration of the processing solution may be effected while the processing solution is circulated in the automatic developing machine. Alternatively, the processing solution may be removed from the processing bath, subjected to a proper regeneration treatment, and then returned to the processing bath as replenisher.
The regeneration of the developer can be accomplished by the ion exchange with an anionic exchange resin, the removal of accummulated substances by electrodialysis and/or the addition of a chemical as regenerant. The percent regeneration is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 70% or more. As such an anionic exchange resin there may be used one commercially available. An ion exchanger having a high selectivity as disclosed in JP-A-63-11005 may be preferably used.
The metal chelate bleaching agent contained in the bleaching solution and/or blix solution becomes a reduced state upon bleach. When the metal chelate of the reduced state is accummulated, the bleaching capacity is lowered. In some cases, the image dye becomes a leuco dye, causing a drop in the image density. Therefore, the bleaching solution and/or blix solution may be preferably subjected to a continuous regeneration treatment in linkage with processing. Specifically, an air pump may be preferably used to blow air through the bleaching solution and/or blix solution so that the metal chelate of the reduced state is reoxidized with oxygen (so-called aeration). The regeneration of the processing solution may also be accomplished by the addition of an oxidizing agent such as hydrogen peroxide, persulfate and bromate.
The regeneration of the fixing solution or blix solution can be accomplished by electrolytic reduction of accummulated silver ions. Accummulated halogen ions may be preferably removed by an anionic exchange resin to maintain the desired fixing properties.
In order to reduce the amount of rinsing solution to be used, ion exchange or ultrafiltration may be used. In particular, ultrafiltration may be preferably used.
The photographic light-sensitive material adapted for the present processing can comprise at least one blue-sensitive layer, at least one green-sensitive layer and at least one red-sensitive layer on a support. The number of silver halide emulsion layers and light-insensitive layers and the order of arrangement of these layers are not specifically limited. In a typical embodiment, the silver halide photographic material comprises light-sensitive layers consisting of a plurality of silver halide emulsion layers having substantially the same color sensitivity and different light sensitivities on a support. The light-sensitive layers are unit light-sensitive layers having a color sensitivity to any of blue light, green light and red light. In the multi-layer silver halide color photographic material, these unit light-sensitive layers are normally arranged in the order of red-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer and blue-sensitive layer as viewed from the support side. However, the order of arrangement can be optionally reversed depending on the purpose of application. Alternatively, two unit light-sensitive layers having the same color sensitivity can be arranged with a unit light-sensitive layer having a different color sensitivity interposed therebetween.
Light-insensitive layers such as various interlayers can be provided between these silver halide light-sensitive layers and on the uppermost layer and lowermost layer.
These interlayers can comprise couplers, DIR compounds or the like as described in JP-A-61-43748, JP-A-59-113438, JP-A-59-113440, JP-A-61-20037 and JP-A-61-20038. These interlayers can further comprise a color stain inhibitor, ultraviolet absorbent, stain inhibitor, etc. as commonly used.
The plurality of silver halide emulsion layers constituting each unit light-sensitive layer can be preferably in a two-layer structure, i.e., high sensitivity emulsion layer and low sensitivity emulsion layer, as described in West German Patent 1,121,470 and British Patent 923,045. In general, these layers are preferably arranged in such an order that the light sensitivity becomes lower towards the support. Furthermore, a light-insensitive layer can be provided between these silver halide emulsion layers. As described in JP-A-57-112751, JP-A-62-200350, JP-A-62-206541, and JP-A-62-206543, a low sensitivity emulsion layer can be provided remote from the support while a high sensitivity emulsion layer can be provided nearer to the support.
In an embodiment of such an arrangement, a low sensitivity blue-sensitive layer (BL), a high sensitivity blue-sensitive layer (BH), a high sensitivity green-sensitive layer (GH), a low sensitivity green-sensitive layer (GL), a high sensitivity red-sensitive layer (RH), and a low sensitivity red-sensitive layer (RL) can be arranged in this order remote from the support. In another embodiment, BH, BL, GL, GH, RH, and RL can be arranged in this order remote from the support. In a further embodiment, BH, BL, GH, GL, RL, and RH can be arranged in this order remote from the support.
As described in JP-B-55-34932, a blue-sensitive layer, GH, RH, GL, and RL can be arranged in this order remote from the support. Alternatively, as described in JP-A-56-25738 and JP-A-62-63936, a blue-sensitive layer, GL, RL, GH, and RH can be arranged in this order remote from the support.
As described in JP-B-49-15495, a layer arrangement can be used such that the uppermost layer is a silver halide emulsion layer having the highest sensitivity, the middle layer is a silver halide emulsion layer having a lower sensitivity, and the lowermost layer is a silver halide emulsion layer having a lower sensitivity than that of the middle layer. In such a layer arrangment, the light sensitivity becomes lower towards the support. Even if the layer structure comprises three layers having different light sensitivities, a middle sensitivity emulsion layer, a high sensitivity emulsion layer and a low sensitivity emulsion layer can be arranged in this order remote from the support in a color-sensitive layer as described in JP-A-59-2024643.
As described above, various layer structures and arrangements can be selected depending on the purpose of light-sensitive material.
Any of these layer arrangements can be applied to the color light-sensitive material of the present invention. In the present invention, the dried thickness of all the constituting layers of the color light-sensitive material except for support and its subbing layer is preferably in the range of 20.0 μm or less, more preferably 18.0 μm or less to accomplish the objects of the present invention.
The specification of the dried film thickness is based on the color developing agent to be incorporated into these constituting layers during and after processing. This means that bleach fogging or stain during the storage of images after processing depends greatly on the amount of the remaining color developing agent. In respect to the occurrence of bleach fogging or stain, the increase in magenta color probably due to the green-sensitive layer is greater than that in cyan and yellow colors.
The lower limit of the specified film thickness is preferably lowered from the above mentioned specification to such an extent that the properties of the light-sensitive material is not remarkably deteriorated. The lower limit of the total dried thickness of the layers constituting the light-sensitive material except support and its subbing layer is 12.0 μm. The lower limit of the total dried thickness of the constituting layers provided between the light-sensitive layer nearest to the support and the subbing layer of the support is 1.0 μm.
The reduction of the film thickness may be effected in either light-sensitive layer or light-insensitive layer.
The film thickness of the multilayer color light-sensitive material of the present invention can be determined in accordance with the following method:
The light-sensitive material specimen is stored at a temperature of 25° C. and a relative humidity of 50% for 7 days. The total thickness of the specimen is determined. The coating layers are then removed from the support. The thickness of the support is determined. The difference in the two measurements is the total thickness of the coating layers. The measurement of the film thickness can be accomplished by means of a contact type thickness meter comprising a piezoelectric element (e.g., K-402B Stand, available from Anritus Electric Co., Ltd.). The removal of the coating layers from the support can be effected by the use of an aqueous solution of sodium hypochlorite.
A section of the specimen is photographed by a scanning type electron microscope preferably at 3,000 power or more. The total thickness of the coating layers on the support and the thickness of each of these coating layers are measured and compared to the measured value of the toal thickness of the coating layers obtained by the film thickness meter (absolute value of the measured thickness) to calculate the thickness of each of these coating layers.
The percent swelling of the light-sensitive material of the present invention [determined by (equilibrium swollen film thickness in water at 25° C.-total dried film thickness at 25° C., 55% RH/total dried film thickness at 25° C., 55% RH)×100] is preferably in the range of 50 to 200%, more preferably 70 to 150%. If this value deviates from the above specified range, the remaining amount of the color developing agent increases, giving adverse effects on photographic properties, desilvering property and other picture qualities, and film physical properties such as film strength.
The swelling rate of the light-sensitive material of the present invention (as determined by T1/2, which is defined by the time required to reach half the saturated swollen film thickness (90% of the maximum swollen film thickness in the color developer (at a temperature of 30° C., 195 seconds) ) is preferably in the range of 15 seconds or less, more preferably 9 seconds or less.
The silver halide to be incorporated in the photographic emulsion layer in the color light-sensitive material of the present invention may be any silver halide composition such as silver chloride, silver bromide, silver bromochloride, silver bromoiodide, silver chloroiodide and silver bromochloroiodide.
Silver halide grains in the photographic emulsions may be so-called regular grains having a regular crystal form, such as cube, octahedron and tetradecahedron, or those having an irregular crystal form such as sphere and tabular, those having a crystal defect such as twinning plane, or those having a combination of these crystal forms.
The silver halide grains may be either fine grains of about 0.2 μm or smaller in diameter or giant grains having a projected area diameter of up to about 10 μm. The emulsion may be either a monodisperse emulsion or a polydisperse emulsion.
The preparation of the silver halide photographic emulsion which can be used in the present invention can be accomplished by any suitable method as described in Research Disclosure No. 17643 (December 1978), pp. 22-23, and No. 307105 (November 1989), pp. 863-865, "I. Emulsion Preparation and Types", and No. 18716 (November 1979), page 648, Glafkides, "Chimie et Physique Photographique", Paul Montel (1967), G. F. Duffin, "Photographic Emulsion Chemistry", Focal Press, 1966, and V. L. Zelikman et al., "Making and Coating Photographic Emulsion Focal Press", 1964.
Furthermore, monodisperse emulsions as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,574,628 and 3,655,394, and British Patent 1,413,748 can be preferably used in the present invention.
Tabular grains having an aspect ratio of about 5 or more can also be used in the present invention. The preparation of such tabular grains can be easily accomplished by any suitable method as described in Gutoff, "Photograpahic Science and Engineering", vol. 14, pp. 248-257, 1970, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,434,226, 4,414,310, 4,433,048, and 4,439,520, and British Patent 2,112,157.
The individual silver halide crystals may have either a homogeneous structure or a heterogeneous structure composed of an inner portion and an outer portion differing in halogen composition, or may have a layered structure. Furthermore, the grains may have fused thereto a silver halide having a different halogen composition or a compound other than silver halide, e.g., silver thiocyanate, lead oxide, etc. by an epitaxial junction.
Mixtures of grains having various crystal forms may also be used.
The silver halide emulsion to be used in the present invention is normally subjected to physical ripening, chemical ripening and spectral sensitization. Additives to be used in these steps are described in Research Disclosure Nos. 17643, 18716 and 307105 as tabulated below.
Known photographic additives which can be used in the present invention are described in the above-cited three Research Disclosures as tabulated below.
______________________________________                                    
              RD17643   RD18716    RD307105                               
Kind of additive                                                          
              [Dec. '78]                                                  
                        [Nov. '79] [No. '89]                              
______________________________________                                    
1. Chemical sensitizer                                                    
              p. 23     p. 648 right                                      
                                   p. 866                                 
                        column (RC)                                       
2. Sensitivity increasing                                                 
                        p. 648 right                                      
agent                   column (RC)                                       
3. Spectral sensitizer                                                    
              pp. 23-24 p. 648 RC- pp. 866-868                            
                        p. 649 RC                                         
4. Brightening agent                                                      
              p. 24     p. 647 RC  p. 868                                 
5. Antifoggant and                                                        
              pp. 24-25 p. 649 RC  pp. 868-870                            
stabilizer                                                                
6. Light absorbent,                                                       
              pp. 25-26 p. 649 RC- p. 873                                 
filter dye, and         p. 650 LC                                         
ultraviolet absorbent                                                     
7. Stain inhibitor                                                        
              p. 25 RC  p. 650 LC-RC                                      
                                   p. 872                                 
8. Dye image stabilizer                                                   
              p. 25     p. 650 LC  "                                      
9. Hardening agent                                                        
              p. 26     p. 651 LC  pp. 874-875                            
10. Binder    p. 26     p. 650 LC  pp. 873-874                            
11. Plasticizer and                                                       
              p. 27     p. 650 RC  p. 876                                 
lubricant                                                                 
12. Coating aid and                                                       
              pp. 26-27 "          pp. 875-876                            
surface active agent                                                      
13. Antistatic agent                                                      
              p. 27     "          pp. 876"877                            
14. Matting agent                  pp. 878-879                            
______________________________________                                    
 couplers are described in the patents described in the above cited
 Research Disclosure No. 17643, VII-C to G and No. 307105, VII-C to G.
Preferred yellow couplers include those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,933,501, 4,022,620, 4,326,024, 4,401,752, 4,248,961, 3,973,968, 4,314,023, and 4,511,649, JP-B-58-10739, British Patents 1,425,020 and 1,476,760, and European Patent 249,473A.
Preferred magenta couplers include 5-pyrazolone compounds and pyrazoloazole compounds. Particularly preferred are those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,310,619, 4,351,897, 3,061,432, 3,725,064, 4,500,630, 4,540,654, and 4,556,630, European Patent 73,636, JP-A-60-33552, JP-A-60-43659, JP-A-61-72238, JP-A-60-35730, JP-A-55-118034, and JP-A-60-185951, RD Nos. 24220 (June 1984) and 24230 (June 1984), and WO(PCT)88/04795. The effects of the present invention on bleach fogging and stain become remarkable particularly with pyrazoloazole couplers.
Cyan couplers include naphthol and phenol couplers. Preferred are those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,052,212, 4,146,396, 4,228,233, 4,296,200, 2,369,929, 2,801,171, 2,772,162, 2,895,826, 3,772,002, 3,758,308, 4,334,011, 4,327,173, 3,446,622, 4,333,999, 4,753,871, 4,451,559, 4,427,767, 4,690,889, 4,254,212, and 4,296,199, West German Patent Disclosure No. 3,329,729, European Patents 121,365A and 249,453A, and JP-A-61-42658.
Colored couplers for correction of unnecessary absorptions of the developed color preferably include those described in Research Disclosure No. 17643, VII-G, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,163,670, 4,004,929, and 4,138,258, JP-B-57-39413, and British Patent 1,146,368. Furthermore, couplers for correction of unnecessary absorptions of the developed color by a fluorescent dye released upon coupling as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,774,181 and couplers containing as a separatable group a dye precursor group capable of reacting with a developing agent to form a dye as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,777,120 can be preferably used.
Couplers which form a dye having moderate diffusibility preferably include those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,366,237, British Patent 2,125,570, European Patent 96,570, and West German Patent Publication No. 3,234,533.
Typical examples of polymerized dye-forming couplers are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,451,820, 4,080,211, 4,367,282, 4,409,320, and 4,576,910, and British Patent 2,102,173.
Couplers capable of releasing a photographically useful residual upon coupling can also be used in the present invention. Preferred examples of DIR couplers which release a developing inhibitor are described in the patents cited in RD 17643, VII-F, JP-A-57-151944, JP-A-57-154234, JP-A-60-184248, and JP-A-63-37346, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,248,962, and 4,782,012.
Couplers capable of imagewise releasing a nucleating agent or a developing accelerator at the time of development preferably include those described in British Patents 2,097,140 and 2,131,188, and JP-A-59-57638 and JP-A-59-170840.
In addition to the foregoing couplers, the photographic material according to the present invention can further comprise competing couplers as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,130,427, polyequivalent couplers as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,283,472, 4,338,393, and 4,310,618, DIR redox compound-releasing couplers, DIR coupler releasing couplers, DIR coupler-releasing redox compound or DIR redox-releasing redox compound as described in JP-A-60-185950 and JP-A-62-24252, couplers capable of releasing a dye which returns to its original color after release as described in European Patent 173,302A, couplers capable of releasing a bleach accelerator as described in RD Nos. 11449 and 24241, and JP-A-61-201247, couplers capable of releasing a ligand as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,553,477, couplers capable of releasing a leuco dye as described in JP-A-63-75747, and couplers capable of releasing a fluorescent dye as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,774,181.
The incorporation of these couplers in the light-sensitive material can be accomplished by any suitable known dispersion method.
Examples of high boiling solvents to be used in the oil-in-water dispersion process are described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,322,027. Specific examples of high boiling organic solvents having a boiling point of 175° C. or higher at normal pressure which can be used in the oil-in-water dispersion process include phthalic esters (e.g., dibutyl phthalate, dicylcohexyl phthalate, di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate, decyl phthalate, bis(2,4-di-t-amylphenyl)phthalate, bis(2,4-di-t-amylphenyl) isophthalate, bis(1,1-diethylpropyl)phthalate), phosphoric or phosphonic esters (e.g., triphenyl phosphate, tricresyl phosphate, 2-ethylhexyl diphenyl phosphate, tricyclohexyl phosphate, tri-2-ethylhexyl phosphate, tridodecyl phosphate, tributoxy ethyl phosphate, trichloropropyl phosphate, di-2-ethylhexyl phenyl phospionate), benzoic esters (e.g., 2-ethylhexyl benzoate, dodecyl benzoate, 2-ethylhexyl-p-hydroxy benzoate), amides (e.g., N,N-diethyldodecanamide, N,N-diethyllaurylamide, N-tetradecylpyrrolidone), alcohols or phenols (e.g., isostearyl alcohol, 2,4-di-tert-amylphenol), aliphatic carboxylic esters (e.g., bis(2-ethylhexyl)sebacate, dioctyl azerate, glycerol tributylate, isostearyl lactate, trioctyl citrate), aniline derivatives (N,N-dibutyl-2-butoxy-5-tert-octylaniline), and hydrocarbons (e.g., paraffin, dodecylbenzene, diisopropyl naphthalene). As an auxiliary solvent there can be used an organic solvent having a boiling point of about 30° C. or higher, preferably 50° C. to about 160° C. Typical examples of such an organic solvent include ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethyl propionate, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2-ethoxyethyl acetate, and dimethylformamide.
The process and effects of latex dispersion method and specific examples of latexes to be used in dipping are described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,199,363, West German Patent Application (OLS) 2,541,274, and 2,541,230.
These couplers can impregnate a loadable latex polymer (as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,203,716) in the presence or absence of the above mentioned high boiling organic solvent or can be dissolved in a water-insoluble and organic solvent-soluble polymer before being emulsion-dispersed in an aqueous solution of hydrophilic colloid.
Preferably, homopolymers or copolymers as described in International Patent Disclosure No. W088/00723, pp. 12-30 can be used. In particular, acrylamide polymers may be preferably used for the purpose of stabilizing dye images or like purposes.
Suitable supports which can be used in the present invention are described in the above cited RD 17643 (page 28) and 18716 (right column on page 647 to left column on page 648).
The present invention can be applied to various color light-sensitive materials such as color negative films for motion picture, color reversal film for slide or television, color paper, direct positive color paper, color positive film and color reversal paper. The color reversal film may be of the so-called coupler-in-emulsion type (coupler incorporated in the light-sensitive material) or the so-called coupler-in-developer type (coupler incorporated in the developer).
The present invention will be further described in the following examples, but the present invention should no be construed as being limited thereto.
EXAMPLE 1
A multilayer color light-sensitive material was prepared as Specimen 101 by coating on a undercoated cellulose triacetate film support various layers having the following compositions.
Composition of Photographic Layer
The coated amount of silver halide and colloidal silver is represented in g/m2 calculated in terms of the amount of silver. The coated amount of couplers, additives and gelatin is represented in g/m2. The coated amount of sensitizing dye is represented in mols per mol of silver halide contained in the same layer.
______________________________________                                    
1st Layer: anti-halation layer                                            
Black colloidal silver (coated silver amount)                             
                         0.20                                             
Gelatin                  2.20                                             
UV-1                     0.11                                             
UV-2                     0.20                                             
Cpd-1                    4.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Cpd-2                    1.9 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.30                                             
Solv-2                   1.2 × 10.sup.-2                            
2nd Layer: interlayer                                                     
Finely divided silver bromide grains (AgI con-                            
                         0.15                                             
tent: 1.0 mol %; diameter: 0.07 μm as calcu-                           
lated in terms of sphere) (coated silver amount)                          
Gelatin                  1.00                                             
ExC-4                    6.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Cpd-3                    2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
3rd layer: 1st red-sensitive emulsion layer                               
Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content:                                 
                         0.42                                             
5.0 mol%; high surface AgI type; diameter:                                
0.9 μm (as calculated in terms of sphere);                             
coefficient of fluctuation in grain diameter: 21%                         
(as calculated in terms of sphere); tabular grains;                       
diameter/thickness ratio: 7.5) (coated silver                             
amount)                                                                   
Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AGI content:                                 
                         0.40                                             
4.0 mol %; high internal AgI type; diameter:                              
0.4 μm (as calculated in terms of sphere);                             
coefficient of fluctuation in grain diameter: 18%                         
(as calculated in terms of sphere); tetra-                                
decahedral grains) (coated silver amount)                                 
Gelatin                  1.90                                             
ExS-1                    4.5 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-2                    1.5 × 10.sup. -4 mol                       
ExS-3                    4.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExC-1                    0.65                                             
ExC-3                    1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-4                    2.3 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.32                                             
4th Layer: 2nd red-sensitive emulsion layer                               
Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content:                                 
                         0.85                                             
8.5 mol %; high internal AgI type; diameter:                              
1.0 μm (as calculated in terms of sphere);                             
coefficient of fluctuation in grain diameter: 25%                         
(as calculated in terms of sphere); tabular grains;                       
diameter/thickness ratio: 3.0) (coated silver                             
amount)                                                                   
Gelatin                  0.91                                             
ExS-1                    3.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-2                    1.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-3                    3.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExC-1                    0.13                                             
ExC-2                    6.2 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-4                    4.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.10                                             
5th Layer: 3rd red-sensitive emulsion layer                               
Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content:                                 
                         1.50                                             
11.3 mol %; high internal AgI type; diameter:                             
1.4 μm (as calculated in terms of sphere);                             
coefficient of fluctuation in grain diameter: 28%                         
(as calculated in terms of sphere); tabular grains;                       
diameter/thickness ratio: 6.0) (coated silver                             
amount)                                                                   
Gelatin                  1.20                                             
ExS-1                    2.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-2                    6.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExS-3                    2.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExC-2                    8.5 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-5                    7.3 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.12                                             
Solv-2                   0.12                                             
6th Layer: interlayer                                                     
Gelatin                  1.00                                             
Cpd-4                    8.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   8.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
7th Layer: lst green-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content:                                 
                         0.28                                             
5.0 mol %; high surface AgI type; diameter:                               
0.9 μm (as calculated in terms of sphere);                             
coefficient of fluctuation in grain diameter: 21%                         
(as calculated in terms of sphere); tabular grains;                       
diameter/thickness ratio: 7.0) (coated silver                             
amount)                                                                   
Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content:                                 
                         0.16                                             
4.0 mol %; high internal AgI type; diameter:                              
0.4 μm (as calculated in terms of sphere);                             
coefficient of fluctuation in grain diameter: 18%                         
18% (as calculated in terms of sphere); tetra-                            
decahtedral grains) (coated silver amount)                                
Gelatin                  1.20                                             
ExS-4                    5.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-5                    2.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-6                    1.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExM-1                    0.50                                             
ExM-2                    0.10                                             
ExM-5                    3.5 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.20                                             
Solv-3                   3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
8th layer: 2nd green-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content:                                 
                         0.57                                             
8.5 mol %; high internal AgI type; diameter:                              
1.0 μm (as calculated in terms of sphere);                             
coefficient of fluctuation in grain diameter: 25%                         
(as calculated in terms of sphere); tabular grains;                       
diameter/thickness ratio: 3.0) (coated silver                             
amount)                                                                   
Gelatin                  0.45                                             
ExS-4                    3.5 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-5                    1.4 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-6                    7.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExM-1                    0.12                                             
ExM-2                    7.1 × 10.sup.-3                            
ExM-3                    3.5 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.15                                             
Solv-3                   1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
9th Layer: interlayer                                                     
Gelatin                  0.50                                             
Solv-1                   2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
10th Layer: 3rd green-sensitive emulsion layer                            
Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content:                                 
                         1.30                                             
11.3 mol %; high internal AgI type; diameter:                             
1.4 μm (as calculated in terms of sphere);                             
coefficient of fluctuation in grain diameter: 28%                         
(as calculated in terms of sphere); tabular grains;                       
diameter/thickness ratio: 6.0) (coated silver                             
amount)                                                                   
Gelatin                  1.20                                             
ExS-4                    2.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-5                    8.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExS-6                    8.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExM-4                    4.5 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExM-6                    1.0 × 10.sup. -2                           
ExC-2                    4.5 × 10.sup.-2                            
Cpd-5                    1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.25                                             
11th Layer: yellow filter layer                                           
Gelatin                  0.50                                             
Cpd-6                    5.2 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.12                                             
12th Layer: interlayer                                                    
Gelatin                  0.45                                             
Cpd-3                    0.10                                             
13th Layer: 1st blue-sensitive layer                                      
Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content:                                 
                         0.20                                             
2 mol %; uniform AgI type; diameter:                                      
0.55 μm (as calculated in terms of sphere);                            
coefficient of fluctuation in grain diameter: 25%                         
(as calculated in terms of sphere); tabular grains;                       
diameter/thickness ratio: 7.0) (coated silver                             
amount)                                                                   
Gelatin                  1.00                                             
ExS-7                    3.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExY-1                    0.60                                             
ExY-2                    2.3 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.15                                             
14th Layer: 2nd blue-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content:                                 
                         0.19                                             
19.0 mol %; high internal AgI type; diameter:                             
1.0 μm (as calculated in terms of sphere);                             
coefficient of fluctuation in grain diameter: 16%                         
(as calculated in terms of sphere); octahedral                            
grains) (coated silver amount)                                            
Gelatin                  0.35                                             
ExS-7                    2.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExY-1                    0.22                                             
Solv-1                   7.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
15th Layer: interlayer                                                    
Finely divided silver bromoiodide (AgI content:                           
                         0.20                                             
2 mol %; uniform AgI type; grain diameter:                                
0.13 μm as calculated in terms of sphere)                              
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                  0.36                                             
16th layer: 3rd blue-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content:                                 
                         1.55                                             
14.0 mol %; high internal AgI type; grain                                 
diameter: 1.7 μm as calculated in terms of                             
sphere; coefficient of fluctuation in grain dia-                          
meter: 28% as calculated in terms of sphere;                              
tabular grains; diameter/thickness ratio: 5.0)                            
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                  1.00                                             
ExS-8                    1.5 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExY-1                    0.21                                             
Solv-1                   7.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
17th layer: lst protective layer                                          
Gelatin                  1.80                                             
UV-1                     0.13                                             
UV-2                     0.21                                             
Solv-1                   1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-2                   1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
18th layer: 2nd protective layer                                          
Finely divided silver bromide grains (grain                               
                         0.36                                             
diameter: 0.07 μm as calculated in terms of                            
sphere) (coated silver amount)                                            
Gelatin                  0.70                                             
B-1 (diameter: 1.5 μm)                                                 
                         2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
B-2 (diameter: 1.5 μm)                                                 
                         0.15                                             
B-3                      3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
W-1                      2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
H-1                      0.35                                             
Cpd-7                    1.00                                             
______________________________________
In addition to the above mentioned components, 1,2-benzisothiazoline-3-one, n-butyl-p-hydroxybenzoate, and 2-phenoxyethanol were incorporated in the specimen in amounts of 200 ppm on the average, about 1,000 ppm and about 10,000 ppm based on gelatin, respectively. The specimen further comprised B-4, B-5, W-2, W-3, F-1, F-2, F-3, F-4, F-5, F-6, F-7, F-8, F-9, F-10, F-11, F-12, F-13, and iron salts, lead salts, gold salts, platinum salts, iridium salts, and rhodium salts. ##STR22##
Specimen 101 thus prepared was exposed to white light (color temperature of light source: 4,800° K.) through an optical wedge, and then processed by means of an automatic developing machine for motion picture in the following process. The processing was continued until the accumulated replenishment of each processing solution reached 2.5 times the capacity of the tank. The processing properties set forth below were the results of the processing which was effected at that time.
______________________________________                                    
Processing step                                                           
                    Temper-   Replenish-                                  
                                      Tank                                
Step     Time       ature     ment rate*                                  
                                      capacity                            
______________________________________                                    
Color    3 min. 15 sec.                                                   
                    38.0° C.                                       
                              23 ml   15 l                                
development                                                               
Bleach   50 sec.    38.0° C.                                       
                               5 ml   5 l                                 
Blix     50 sec.    38.0° C.                                       
                              --      5 l                                 
Fixing   50 sec.    38.0° C.                                       
                              16 ml   5 l                                 
Washing (1)                                                               
         30 sec.    38.0° C.                                       
                              --      3 l                                 
Washing (2)                                                               
         20 sec.    38.0° C.                                       
                              34 ml   3 l                                 
Stabilization                                                             
         20 sec.    38.0° C.                                       
                              20 ml   3 l                                 
Drying   1 min.       55° C.                                       
______________________________________                                    
 *Determined per 35mm width and 1m length
The washing step was effected in a countercurrent process wherein the washing water flows from (2) to (1). The oveflow solution from the washing tank was all introduced into the fixing bath. The bleaching bath was provided with a subtank through which air was blown into the bleaching bath at a rate of about 200 ml/min. to aerate the bleaching solution. The processing baths were each provided with an agitating means as described in JP-A-62-183460 so that a jet of the processing solution was allowed to collide with the emulsion surface of the light-sensitive material. The replenishment of the blix bath was accomplished by replenishing the bleaching bath and the fixing bath in such an arrangement that the upper portion of the bleaching bath and the lower portion of the blix bath, and the upper portion of the fixing bath and the lower portion of the blix bath were connected to each other via a pipe in the automatic developing machine so that the overflow solution from the bleaching bath and the fixing bath resulted by replenishing was all introduced into the blix bath. The amount of the developer to be brought over to the bleaching bath, the amount of the bleaching solution to be brought over to the blix bath, the amount of the blix solution to be brought over to the fixing bath, and the amount of the fixing solution to be brought over to the washing bath were 2.5 ml, 2.0 ml, 2.0 ml, and 2.0 ml per m of 35-mm wide light-sensitive material, respectively. The time for crossover was 5 seconds in all the steps. This crossover time is included in the processing time at the previous step.
The various processing solutions had the following compositions:
______________________________________                                    
              Mother Solution                                             
                         Replenisher                                      
______________________________________                                    
Diethylenetriamine-                                                       
                  2.0    g        2.2  g                                  
pentaacetic acid                                                          
1-Hydroxyethylidene-                                                      
                  3.3    g        3.3  g                                  
1,1-diphosphonic acid                                                     
Sodium sulfite    3.9    g        5.2  g                                  
Potassium carbonate                                                       
                  37.5   g        39.0 g                                  
Potassium bromide 1.4    g        0.4  g                                  
Potassium iodide  1.3    mg                                               
Hydroxylamine sulfate                                                     
                  2.4    g        3.3  g                                  
2-methyl-4-[4-ethyl-N-                                                    
                  4.5    g        6.1  g                                  
(β-hydroxyethyl)amino]-                                              
aniline sulfate                                                           
Water to make     1.0    l        1.0  l                                  
pH                10.05           10.15                                   
______________________________________
Bleaching Solution 
______________________________________                                    
                Mother Solution                                           
                           Replenisher                                    
______________________________________                                    
Compound as set forth in Table 1                                          
                   0.383  mol      0.547                                  
                                        mol                               
Ferric nitrate nonahydrate                                                
                   0.370  mol      0.528                                  
                                        mol                               
Ammonium bromide   84.0   g        120.0                                  
                                        g                                 
Ammonium nitrate   17.5   g        25.0 g                                 
Hydroxyacetic acid 63.0   g        90.0 g                                 
Acetic acid        33.2   g        47.4 g                                 
Water to make      1.0    l        1.0  l                                 
pH adjusted with aqueous                                                  
                   3.60            2.80                                   
ammonia                                                                   
______________________________________
Mother Solution for Blix Bath
A mixture of 15:85 of the above mentioned mother solution of bleaching solution and the above mentioned mother solution of fixing solution.
Fixing Solution 
______________________________________                                    
                Mother Solution                                           
                           Replenisher                                    
______________________________________                                    
Ammonium sulfite    19.0   g       57.0 g                                 
Aqueous solution of ammonium                                              
                    280.0  ml      840  ml                                
thiosulfate (700 g/l)                                                     
Imidazole           28.5   g       85.5 g                                 
Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid                                           
                    12.5   g       37.5 g                                 
acid                                                                      
Water to make       1.0    l       1.0  l                                 
pH adjusted with aqueous                                                  
                    7.40           7.45                                   
ammonia and acetic acid                                                   
______________________________________
Washing Solution (The Mother Solution Was Used Also As Replenisher)
Tap water was passed through a mixed bed column packed with an H-type strongly acidic cation exchange resin (Amberlite IR-120B available from Rohm & Haas) and an OH-type strongly basic anion exchange resin (Amberlite IRA-400 available from the same company) so that the calcium and magnesium ion concentrations were each reduced to 3 mg/l or less. Dichlorinated sodium isocyanurate and sodium sulfate were then added to the solution in amounts of 20 mg and 150 mg/l, respectively.
The washing solution thus obtained had a pH value of 6.5 to 7.5.
Stabilizing Solution
(The mother solution was used also as replenisher)
______________________________________                                    
37% Formalin              2.0 ml                                          
Polyoxyethylene-p-monononylphenylether                                    
                          0.3                                             
(mean polymerization degree: 10)                                          
Disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid                                  
                          0.05                                            
Water to make             1.0 l                                           
pH                        5.0-8.0                                         
______________________________________
Specimen 101 thus processed was measured for the remaining amount of silver on the maximum density portion by means of a fluorescent X-ray analyzer. The results are set forth in Table 1. The specimen was also measured for green density on the minimum density portion. Furthermore, another Specimen 101 was processed in the same manner as mentioned above except that the bleaching solution to be used in the automatic developing machine was replaced by the following reference bleaching solution causing no bleach fogging. The difference in the density on Dmin portion from that obtained by using the reference bleaching solution was determined as bleach fogging. The results are set forth in Table 1.
Reference Bleaching Solution 
______________________________________                                    
Ferric sodium ethylenediamine-                                            
                        100    g                                          
tetraacetate trihydrate                                                   
Disodium ethylenediamine-                                                 
                        10     g                                          
tetraacetate                                                              
Ammonium bromide        100    g                                          
Ammonium nitrate        30     g                                          
27% Aqueous ammonia     6.5    ml                                         
Water to make           1.0    l                                          
pH                      6.0                                               
______________________________________
The above mentioned specimen was stored at a temperature of 60° C. and a relative humidity of 70% for 4 weeks, and then measured for the green density on Dmin portion. The results are set forth in Table 1.
              TABLE 1                                                     
______________________________________                                    
                 Remaining                                                
                 amount of  Bleach   Increase                             
                 silver     fogging  in stain                             
No.   Compound   [μg/cm.sup.2 ]                                        
                            ΔDmin (G)                               
                                     ΔD (G)                         
______________________________________                                    
101   Comparative                                                         
                 14.0       0.00     0.30                                 
      Compound A                                                          
102   Comparative                                                         
                 0.8        0.10     0.16                                 
      Compound B                                                          
103   Comparative                                                         
                 0.7        0.11     0.16                                 
      Compound C                                                          
104   Present    0.9        0.04     0.06                                 
      Compound 1                                                          
105   Present    0.8        0.03     0.05                                 
      Compound 2                                                          
106   Present    0.3        0.02     0.02                                 
      Compound 3                                                          
107   Present    0.4        0.02     0.02                                 
      Compound 4                                                          
108   Present    0.4        0.04     0.03                                 
      Compound 5                                                          
109   Present    0.7        0.00     0.03                                 
      Compound 7                                                          
110   Present    0.6        0.03     0.03                                 
      Compound 8                                                          
111   Present    0.7        0.03     0.02                                 
      Compound 11                                                         
112   Present    0.8        0.02     0.04                                 
      Compound 16                                                         
113   Present    0.5        0.03     0.03                                 
      Compound 19                                                         
114   Present    0.5        0.02     0.04                                 
      Compound 21                                                         
115   Present    0.3        0.02     0.02                                 
      Compound 28                                                         
116   Present    0.6        0.04     0.03                                 
      Compound 29                                                         
117   Present    0.4        0.03     0.06                                 
      Compound 30                                                         
118   Present    0.4        0.04     0.05                                 
      Compound 33                                                         
119   Present    0.4        0.02     0.04                                 
      Compound 40                                                         
120   Comparative                                                         
                 6.0        0.19     0.24                                 
      Compound G                                                          
______________________________________                                    
 (Note: Specimens 101 to 103 and 120 are comparative while the others are 
 according to the present invention)                                      
Comparative Compound A:                                                   
                Ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid                          
Comparative Compound B:                                                   
                1,3-Diaminopropanetetraacetic acid                        
Comparative Compound C:                                                   
                1,4-Diaminobutanetetraacetic acid                         
Comparative Compound G:                                                   
                 ##STR23##                                                
The results set forth in Table 1 show that as compared to the processing  
solutions comprising the comparative compounds the processing solution    
having a bleaching capacity comprising the chelate compounds of the       
present invention can reduce the remaining amount of silver and cause     
little bleach fogging and little increase in stain after processing.
A multilayer color light-sensitive material was prepared as Specimen 102 by coating on a undercoated cellulose triacetate film support various layers having the following compositions.
Composition of Photographic Layer
The coated amount of each component is represented in g/m2. The coated amount of silver halide is represented in g/m2 as calculated in terms of amount of silver. The coated amount of sensitizing dye is represented in mol per mol of silver halide contained in (Specimen 102)
______________________________________                                    
1st layer: antihalation layer                                             
Black colloidal silver (silver)                                           
                        0.18                                              
Gelatin                 1.40                                              
2nd Layer: interlayer                                                     
2,5-Di-t-pentadecylhydroquinone                                           
                        0.18                                              
EX-1                    0.070                                             
EX-3                    0.020                                             
EX-12                   2.0 × 10.sup.-3                             
U-1                     0.060                                             
U-2                     0.080                                             
U-3                     0.10                                              
HBS-1                   0.10                                              
HBS-2                   0.020                                             
Gelatin                 1.04                                              
3rd layer: 1st red-sensitive emulsion layer                               
Emulsion A (silver)     0.25                                              
Emulsion B (silver)     0.25                                              
Sensitizing dye I       6.9 × 10.sup.-5                             
Sensitizing dye II      1.8 × 10.sup.-5                             
Sensitizing dye III     3.1 × 10.sup.-4                             
EX-2                    0.34                                              
EX-10                   0.020                                             
U-1                     0.070                                             
U-2                     0.050                                             
HBS-1                   0.060                                             
Gelatin                 0.87                                              
4th layer: 2nd red-sensitive emulsion layer                               
Emulsion G (silver)     1.00                                              
Sensitizing dye I       5.1 × 10.sup.-5                             
Sensitizing dye II      1.4 × 10.sup.-5                             
Sensitizing dye III     2.3 × 10.sup.-4                             
EX-2                    0.40                                              
EX-3                    0.050                                             
EX-10                   0.015                                             
U-1                     0.070                                             
U-2                     0.050                                             
U-3                     0.070                                             
Gelatin                 1.30                                              
5th Layer: 3rd red-sensitive emulsion layer                               
Emulsion D (silver)     1.60                                              
Sensitizing dye I       5.4 × 10.sup.-5                             
Sensitizing dye II      1.4 × 10.sup.-5                             
Sensitizing dye III     2.4 × 10.sup.-4                             
EX-2                    0.097                                             
EX-3                    0.010                                             
EX-4                    0.080                                             
HBS-1                   0.22                                              
HBS-2                   0.10                                              
Gelatin                 1.63                                              
6th Layer: interlayer                                                     
EX-5                    0.040                                             
HBS-1                   0.020                                             
Gelatin                 0.80                                              
7th layer: 1st green-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Emulsion A (silver)     0.15                                              
Emulsion B (silver)     0.15                                              
Sensitizing dye IV      3.0 × 10.sup.-5                             
Sensitizing dye V       1.0 × 10.sup.-4                             
Sensitizing dye VI      3.8 × 10.sup.-4                             
EX-1                    0.021                                             
EX-6                    0.26                                              
EX-7                    0.030                                             
EX-8                    0.025                                             
HBS-1                   0.10                                              
HBS-3                   0.010                                             
Gelatin                 0.63                                              
8th Layer: 2nd green-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Emulsion C (silver)     0.45                                              
Sensitizing dye IV      2.1 × 10.sup.-5                             
Sensitizing dye V       7.0 × 10.sup.-5                             
Sensitizing dye VI      2.6 × 10.sup.-4                             
EX-6                    0.094                                             
EX-7                    0.026                                             
EX-8                    0.018                                             
HBS-1                   0.16                                              
HBS-3                   8.0 × 10.sup.-3                             
Gelatin                 0.50                                              
9th Layer: 3rd green-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Emulsion E (silver)     1.20                                              
Sensitizing dye IV      3.5 × 10.sup.-5                             
Sensitizing dye V       8.0 × 10.sup.-5                             
Sensitizing dye VI      3.0 × 10.sup.-4                             
EX-1                    0.025                                             
EX-11                   0.10                                              
EX-13                   0.015                                             
HBS-1                   0.25                                              
HBS-2                   0.10                                              
Gelatin                 1.54                                              
10th Layer: yellow filter layer                                           
Yellow collidal silver (silver)                                           
                        0.050                                             
EX-5                    0.080                                             
HBS-1                   0.030                                             
Gelatin                 0.95                                              
11th Layer: 1st blue-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Emulsion A (silver)     0.080                                             
Emulsion B (silver)     0.070                                             
Emulsion F (silver)     0.070                                             
Sensitizing dye VII     3.5 × 10.sup.-4                             
EX-8                    0.042                                             
EX-9                    0.72                                              
HBS-1                   0.28                                              
Gelatin                 1.10                                              
12th Layer: 2nd blue-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Emulsion G (silver)     0.45                                              
Sensitizing dye VII     2.1 × 10.sup.-4                             
EX-9                    0.15                                              
EX-10                   7.0 × 10.sup.-3                             
HBS-1                   0.050                                             
Gelatin                 0.78                                              
13th Layer: 3rd blue-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Emulsion H (silver)     0.77                                              
Sensitizing dye VII     2.2 × 10.sup.-4                             
EX-9                    0.20                                              
HBS-1                   0.070                                             
Gelatin                 0.69                                              
14th Layer: 1st protective layer                                          
Emulsion I (silver)     0.20                                              
U-4                     0.11                                              
U-5                     0.17                                              
HBS-1                   5.0 × 10.sup.-2                             
Gelatin                 1.00                                              
15th Layer: 2nd protective layer                                          
H-1                     0.40                                              
B-1 (diameter: 1.7 μm)                                                 
                        5.0 × 10.sup.-2                             
B-2 (diameter: 1.7 μm)                                                 
                        0.10                                              
B-3                     0.10                                              
S-1                     0.20                                              
Gelatin                 1.20                                              
______________________________________
In addition to the above mentioned components, W-1, W-2, W-3, B-4, B-5, F-1, F-2, F-3, F-4, F-5, F-6, F-7, F-8, F-9, F-10, F-11, F-12, F-13 and iron salts, lead salts, gold salts, platinum salts, iridium salts, and rhodium salts were incorporated in all these layers.
                                  TABLE 1                                 
__________________________________________________________________________
                  Grain                                                   
             Mean diameter                                                
       Mean AgI                                                           
             grain                                                        
                  fluctuation                                             
                        Diameter/                                         
       content                                                            
             diameter                                                     
                  coefficient                                             
                        thickness                                         
       (%)   (μm)                                                      
                  (%)   ratio Ratio of amount of silver (% AgI            
__________________________________________________________________________
                              content)                                    
Emulsion A                                                                
       4.0   0.45 27    1     Core/shell = 1/3(13/1);                     
                                           double structure               
Emulsion B                                                                
       8.9   0.70 14    1     Core/shell = 3/7(25/2);                     
                                           double structure               
Emulsion C                                                                
       10    0.75 30    2     Core/shell = 1/2(24/3);                     
                                           double structure               
Emulsion D                                                                
       16    1.05 35    2     Core/shell = 4/6(40/0);                     
                                           double structure               
Emulsion E                                                                
       10    1.05 35    3     Core/shell = 1/2(24/3);                     
                                           double structure               
Emulsion F                                                                
       4.0   0.25 28    1     Core/shell = 1/3(13/1);                     
                                           double structure               
Emulsion G                                                                
       14.0  0.75 25    2     Core/shell = 1/2(42/0);                     
                                           double structure               
Emulsion H                                                                
       14.5  1.30 25    3     Core/shell = 37/63(34/3);                   
                                           double structure               
Emulsion I                                                                
       1     0.07 15    1     Uniform grain                               
__________________________________________________________________________
 ##STR24##
Specimen 102 thus prepared was exposed to white light (color temperature of light source: 4,800° K.) through an optical wedge, and then processed by means of an automatic developing machine for motion picture in the following process. The processing was continued until the accumulated replenishment of each processing solution reached 2.5 times the capacity of the running tank. The processing properties set forth below were the results of the processing which was effected at that time.
______________________________________                                    
Processing step                                                           
                              Replenish-                                  
                                      Tank                                
Step      Time     Temperature                                            
                              ment rate*                                  
                                      capacity                            
______________________________________                                    
Color     1     min.   45.0° C.                                    
                                10 ml   2 l                               
development                                                               
Bleach 1  40    sec.   43.0° C.                                    
                                 5 ml   1 l                               
Bleach 2  20    sec.   "                                                  
Fixing    40    sec.   "        30 ml   1 l                               
Washing with                                                              
          20    sec.   "        30 ml   1 l                               
water                                                                     
Drying    40    sec.     70° C.                                    
______________________________________                                    
 *Determined per 35mm width and 1m length
The aeration of the bleaching bath was effected in the same manner as in Example 1. The agitation in each processing bath was effected in the same manner as in Example 1. The amount of the processing solution to be brought over from each processing bath to its subsequent bath was 2.2 ml per m of 35-mm wide light-sensitive material. The time for crossover was 6 seconds in all the steps.
Color Developer 
______________________________________                                    
                Mother                                                    
                Solution                                                  
                       Replenisher                                        
______________________________________                                    
Diethylenetriamine-                                                       
                  2.2    g     2.2    g                                   
pentaacetic acid                                                          
1-Hydroxyethylidene-                                                      
                  3.0    g     3.2    g                                   
1,1-diphosphonic acid                                                     
Sodium sulfite    4.1    g     4.9    g                                   
Potassium carbonate                                                       
                  38     g     40     g                                   
Potassium iodide  1.3    mg    --                                         
Hydroxylamine sulfate                                                     
                  2.4    g     3.3    g                                   
2-methyl-4-[4-ethyl-N-                                                    
                  13.8   g     17.0   g                                   
(β-hydroxyethyl)amino]                                               
aniline sulfate                                                           
2-Methyl-imidazole                                                        
                  820    mg    820    mg                                  
5-Nitrobenzimidazole                                                      
                  30     g     31     g                                   
1-Phenyl-4-methyl-4-                                                      
                  50     mg    50     mg                                  
hydroymethyl-3-                                                           
pyrazolidone                                                              
Water to make     1,000  ml    1,000  ml                                  
pH (25° C.)                                                        
                  10.30        10.51                                      
______________________________________
Bleaching Solution 
______________________________________                                    
               Running                                                    
               Solution                                                   
                       Replenisher                                        
______________________________________                                    
Chelate compound as set                                                   
                 0.37   mol    0.50   mol                                 
forth in Table 2                                                          
Ammonium bromide 80     g      114    g                                   
Ammonium nitrate 15     g      21.4   g                                   
90% Acetic acid  42     g      60     g                                   
Water to make    1,000  ml     1,000  ml                                  
pH               4.5           4.5                                        
______________________________________
Fixing Solution (Mother Solution Was Used Also As Replenisher) 
______________________________________                                    
70% Ammonium thiosulfate                                                  
                        280    ml                                         
Ethylenediaminetetraacetic                                                
                        10     g                                          
acid                                                                      
Ammonium sulfite        28     g                                          
Water to make           1,000  l                                          
pH                      7.80                                              
______________________________________
The specimen thus processed was then evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. The results are set forth in Table 2.
                                  TABLE 2                                 
__________________________________________________________________________
                     Remaining                                            
                 Bleach                                                   
                     amount                                               
                           Bleach                                         
                                 Stain                                    
   Metal chelate time                                                     
                     of silver                                            
                           fogging                                        
                                 with time                                
No.                                                                       
   compound      (sec.)                                                   
                     (μg/cm.sup.2)                                     
                           ΔDmin (G)                                
                                 ΔDmin (G)                          
                                       Remarks                            
__________________________________________________________________________
201                                                                       
   Comparative Compound D                                                 
                 40  17.0  0.01  0.84  Comparative                        
                 20  41.3  0.01  0.95  Comparative                        
202                                                                       
   Comparative Compound E                                                 
                 40  1.1   0.30  0.30  Comparative                        
                 20  6.0   0.19  0.35  Comparative                        
203                                                                       
   Comparative Compound F                                                 
                 40  1.0   0.32  0.31  Comparative                        
                 20  5.9   0.21  0.37  Comparative                        
204                                                                       
   Present Compound K-3                                                   
                 40  0.6   0.02  0.05  Present Invention                  
                 20  0.9   0.01  0.06  Present Invention                  
205                                                                       
   Present Compound K-4                                                   
                 40  0.7   0.02  0.07  Present Invention                  
                 20  1.1   0.01  0.09  Present Invention                  
206                                                                       
   Present Compound K-8                                                   
                 40  0.9   0.03  0.07  Present Invention                  
                 20  1.0   0.02  0.09  Present Invention                  
207                                                                       
   Present Compound K-19                                                  
                 40  0.8   0.01  0.06  Present Invention                  
                 20  1.0   0.01  0.08  Present Invention                  
208                                                                       
   Present Compound K-21                                                  
                 40  0.8   0.06  0.07  Present Invention                  
                 20  1.2   0.05  0.08  Present Invention                  
__________________________________________________________________________
Table 2 shows that as compared to the comparative bleaching solutions the bleaching solutions comprising the present metal chelate compounds as bleaching agents can exhibit a sufficient bleaching capacity even upon short time bleach and cause little bleach fogging and little increase in stain with time. ##STR25##
EXAMPLE 3
A multilayer color photographic paper specimen was prepared by coating on a polyethylene both sides-laminated paper support which had been corona-discharged and then provided with a gelatin subbing layer containing sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate various photographic constiuent layers having the following compositions. The coating liquids for these layers were prepared as follows:
Coating Liquid for 1st Layer
19.1 g of a yellow coupler (ExY), 4.4 g of a dye stabilizer (Cpd-1) and 0.7 g of a dye stabilizer (Cpd-7) were dissolved in 27.2 ml of ethyl acetate, 4.1 g of a solvent (Solv-3) and 4.1 g of a solvent (Solv-7). The solution thus obtained was then emulsion-dispersed in 185 ml of a 10% aqueous solution of gelatin containing 8 ml of 10% sodium dodecylbenzensulfonate to prepare Emulsion Dispersion A. On the other hand, a silver bromochloride emulsion A (3:7 mixture (ratio of molar amount of silver) of a large size emulsion A of cubic grains with a mean grain size of 0.88 μm and a grain size distribution fluctuation coefficient of 0.08 and a small size emulsion A of cubic grains with a mean grain size of 0.70 μm and a grain size distribution fluctuation coefficient of 0.10, both having 0.3 mol % silver bromide localized on the surface thereof) was prepared by incorporating the blue-sensitive sensitizing dyes A and B as described later in amounts of 2.0×10-4 mol and 2.5×10-4 mol based on mol of silver in the large size emulsion A and the small size emulsion A, respectively, and then subjecting the material to chemical sensitization with a sulfur sensitizer and a gold sensitizer. Emulsion Dispersion A and Silver Bromochloride Emulsion A were then mixed and dissolved to prepare a coating liquid for the 1st layer having the following composition.
Coating liquids for the 2nd to 7th layers were prepared in the same manner as in the 1st layer coating liquid. There was incorporated in each layer a sodium salt of sodium salt of 1-oxy-3,5-dichloro-s-triazine as gelatin hardener.
To each of these layers were added Cpd-10 and Cpd-11 in amounts of 25.0 mg/m2 and 50.0 mg/m2, respectively.
In the silver bromochloride emulsion for each light-sensitive emulsion layer were incorporated the following spectral sensitizing dyes: ##STR26##
(2.0×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide in the large size emulsion A and 2.5×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide in the small size emulsion A) ##STR27##
(4.0×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide in the large size emulsion B and 5.6×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide in the small size emulsion B) ##STR28##
(7.0×10-5 mol per mol of silver halide in the large size emulsion B and 1.0×10-5 mol per mol of silver halide in the small size emulsion B) ##STR29##
(0.9×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide in the large size emulsion C and 1.1×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide in the small size emulsion C)
In the red-sensitive emulsion layer was incorporated the following compound in an amount of 2.6×10-3 mol per mol of silver halide: ##STR30##
In the blue-sensitive emulsion layer, the green-sensitive emulsion layer and the red-sensitive emulsion layer was incorporated 1-(5-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole in amounts of 8.5×10-5 mol, 7.7×10-4 mol and 2.5×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide.
In the blue-sensitive emulsion layer and the green-sensitive emulsion layer was incorporated 4-hydroxy-6-methyl-1,3,3a,7-tetrazaindene in amounts of 1×10-4 mol and 2×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide.
In order to inhibit irradiation, the following dyes were incorporated in these emulsion layers (figure in parenthesis indicates coated amount). ##STR31##
Layer Structure
The composition of these layers will be set forth below. The figure indicate coated amount in g/m2. The coated amount of silver halide emulsion is represented as calculated in terms of amount of silver.
Support
Polyethylene-laminated paper [containing a white pigment (TiO2) and a bluish dye (ultramarine) on the 1st layer side]
__________________________________________________________________________
1st layer: blue-sensitive emulsion layer                                  
Silver bromochloride emulsion A as set forth above                        
                                          0.30                            
Gelatin                                   1.86                            
Yellow coupler (ExY)                      0.82                            
Dye stabilizer (Cpd-1)                    0.19                            
Solvent (Solv-3)                          0.18                            
Solvent (Solv-7)                          0.18                            
Dye stabilizer (Cpd-7)                    0.06                            
2nd layer: color mixing inhibiting layer                                  
Gelatin                                   0.99                            
Color mixing inhibitor (Cpd-5)            0.08                            
Solvent (Solv-1)                          0.16                            
Solvent (Solv-4)                          0.08                            
3rd layer: green-sensitive emulsion layer                                 
Silver bromochloride emulsion (1:3 mixture (ratio of molar amount of      
silver) of a large                        0.12                            
size emulsion B of cubic grains with a mean grain size of 0.55 μm and  
a grain size                                                              
distribution fluctuation coefficient of 0.10 and a small size emulsion B  
of cubic grains with                                                      
a mean grain size of 0.39 μm and a grain size distribution fluctuation 
coefficient of 0.08,                                                      
both having 0.8 mol % silver bromide localized on the surface thereof)    
Gelatin                                   1.24                            
Magenta coupler (ExM)                     0.23                            
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-2)              0.03                            
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-3)              0.16                            
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-4)              0.02                            
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-9)              0.02                            
Solvent (Solv-2)                          0.40                            
4th layer: ultraviolet-absorbing layer                                    
Gelatin                                   1.58                            
Ultraviolet absorbent (UV-1)              0.47                            
Color mixing inhibitor (Cpd-5)            0.05                            
Solvent (Solv-5)                          0.24                            
5th layer: red-sensitive emulsion layer                                   
Silver bromochloride emulsion (1:4 mixture (ratio of molar amount of      
silver) of a large                        0.23                            
size emulsion C of cubic grains with a mean grain size of 0.58 μm and  
a grain size                                                              
distribution fluctuation coefficient of 0.09 and a small size emulsion C  
of cubic grains with                                                      
a mean grain size of 0.45 μm and a grain size distribution fluctuation 
coefficient of 0.11,                                                      
both having 0.6 mol % silver bromide localized on the surface thereof)    
Gelatin                                   1.34                            
Cyan coupler (ExC)                        0.32                            
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-2)              0.03                            
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-4)              0.02                            
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-6)              0.18                            
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-7)              0.40                            
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-8)              0.05                            
Solvent (Solv-6)                          0.14                            
6th layer: ultraviolet-absorbing layer                                    
Gelatin                                   0.53                            
Ultraviolet absorbent (UV-1)              0.16                            
Color stain inhibitor (Cpd-5)             0.02                            
Solvent (Solv-5)                          0.08                            
7th layer: protective layer                                               
Gelatin                                   1.33                            
Acryl-modified copolymer of polyvinyl alcohol (modified degree:           
                                          0.17                            
Liquid paraffin                           0.03                            
__________________________________________________________________________
Yellow coupler (ExY)                                                      
1:1 (molar ratio) mixture of                                              
 ##STR32##                                                                
 ##STR33##                                                                
 ##STR34##                                                                
Magenta coupler (ExM)                                                     
 ##STR35##                                                                
Cyan coupler (ExC)                                                        
 ##STR36##                                                                
 ##STR37##                                                                
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-1)                                              
 ##STR38##                                                                
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-2)                                              
 ##STR39##                                                                
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-3)                                              
 ##STR40##                                                                
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-4)                                              
 ##STR41##                                                                
Color mixing inhibitor (Cpd-5)                                            
 ##STR42##                                                                
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-6)                                              
2:4:4 (weight ratio) mixture of:                                          
 ##STR43##                                                                
 ##STR44##                                                                
 ##STR45##                                                                
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-7)                                              
 ##STR46##                                                                
(Average MW 60,000)                                                       
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-8)                                              
1:1 (weight ratio) mixture of:                                            
 ##STR47##                                                                
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-9)                                              
 ##STR48##                                                                
Antiseptic agent (Cpd-10)                                                 
 ##STR49##                                                                
Antiseptic agent (Cpd-11)                                                 
 ##STR50##                                                                
Ultraviolet absorbent (UV-1)                                              
4:2:4 (weight ratio) mixture of:                                          
 ##STR51##                                                                
 ##STR52##                                                                
 ##STR53##                                                                
Solvent (Solv-1)                                                          
 ##STR54##                                                                
Solvent (Solv-2)                                                          
1:1 (by volume) mixture of:                                               
 ##STR55##                                                                
 ##STR56##                                                                
Solvent (Solv-3)                                                          
OP[OC.sub. 9 H.sub.19 (iso)].sub.3                                        
Solvent (Solv-4)                                                          
 ##STR57##                                                                
Solvent (Solv-5)                                                          
 ##STR58##                                                                
Solvent (Solv-6)                                                          
80:20 Mixture (by volume) of:                                             
 ##STR59##                                                                
 ##STR60##                                                                
Solvent (Solv-7)                                                          
 ##STR61##                                                                
The specimen thus prepared was stepwise exposed to light (color           
temperature of light source: 3,800° K.) through an optical wedge,  
and then processed by means of an automatic developing machine in the     
following process. The processing was continued until the accumulated     
replenishment of each processing solution reached 3 times the capacity of 
the tank. The results of the processing which was effected at that time
The remaining amount of silver on the maximum density portion was measured by fluorescent X-ray analysis. The bleach fogging was determined as difference in the green density on Dmin portion from that obtained with the following reference bleaching solution causing no bleach fogging in stead of the blix solution. Furthermore, the specimen processed in the former processing solution was stored at a temperature of 80° C. and a relative humidity of 70% for 1 week, and then measured for increase in stain after processing.
______________________________________                                    
Processing step                                                           
                             Replenish-                                   
                                      Tank                                
Step     Time     Temperature                                             
                             ment rate*                                   
                                      capacity                            
______________________________________                                    
Color    45 sec.  39.0° C.                                         
                             70 ml    20 l                                
development                                                               
Blix     45 sec.  35.0° C.                                         
                              60 ml** 20 l                                
Rinse (1)                                                                 
         20 sec.  35.0° C.                                         
                             --       10 l                                
Rinse (2)                                                                 
         20 sec.  35.0° C.                                         
                             --       10 l                                
Rinse (3)                                                                 
         20 sec.  35.0° C.                                         
                             360 ml   10 l                                
Drying   60 sec.    80° C.                                         
______________________________________                                    
 *Determined per m.sup.2 of lightsensitive material                       
 The rinse step was effected in a 3tank countercurrent process wherein the
 washing water flows from (3) to (1).                                     
 **In addition to 60 ml, the solution from Rinse (1) was introduced into  
 this step at a rate of 120 ml per m.sup.2 of lightsensitive material.
Color Developer 
______________________________________                                    
                  Tank                                                    
                  Solution                                                
                         Replenisher                                      
______________________________________                                    
Water               700    ml    700   ml                                 
Diethylenetriamine- 0.4    g     0.4   g                                  
pentaacetic acid                                                          
N,N,N-tris(methylene-                                                     
                    4.0    g     4.0   g                                  
phosphonic acid)                                                          
Disodium 1,2-dihydroxybenzene-                                            
                    0.5    g     0.5   g                                  
4,6-disulfonate                                                           
Triethanolamine     12.0   g     12.0  g                                  
Potassium chloride  6.5    g     --                                       
Potassium bromide   0.03   g     --                                       
Potassium carbonate 27.0   g     27.0  g                                  
Fluorescent brightening agent                                             
                    1.0    g     3.0   g                                  
(WHITEX 4B, available from                                                
Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.)                                              
Sodium sulfite      0.1    g     0.1   g                                  
N,N-bis(sulfoethyl)-                                                      
                    10.0   g     13.0  g                                  
hydroxylamine                                                             
N-ethyl-N-(β-methane-                                                
                    5.0    g     11.5  g                                  
sulfonamidoethyl)-3-                                                      
methyl-4-aminoaniline                                                     
sulfate                                                                   
Water to make       1,000  ml    1,000 ml                                 
pH                  10.10        11.10                                    
______________________________________
Blix Solution 
______________________________________                                    
               Tank                                                       
               Solution                                                   
                       Replenisher                                        
______________________________________                                    
Water            600    ml     150    ml                                  
Ammonium thiosulfate                                                      
                 100    ml     250    ml                                  
(700 g/l)                                                                 
Ammonium sulfite 40     g      100    g                                   
Compound as set forth                                                     
                 0.155  mol    0.383  mol                                 
in Table 3                                                                
Ferric nitrate   0.138  mol    0.340  mol                                 
nonahydrate                                                               
Ammonium bromide 40     g      75     g                                   
Nitric acid (67%)                                                         
                 30     g      65     g                                   
Water to make    1,000  ml     1,000  ml                                  
pH (25° C.) adjusted                                               
                 5.8           5.6                                        
with acetic acid                                                          
and aqueous ammonia                                                       
______________________________________
Reference Blix Solution for Evaluation of Bleach Fogging 
______________________________________                                    
Water                    600    ml                                        
Ammonium thiosulfate (70%)                                                
                         100    ml                                        
Ammonium sulfite         40     g                                         
Ferric ammonium ethylenediamine-                                          
                         50     g                                         
tetraacetate                                                              
Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid                                           
                         5      g                                         
Ammonium bromide         40     g                                         
Acetic acid (67%)        30     g                                         
Water to make            1,000  ml                                        
pH (25° C.)       5.8                                              
______________________________________                                    

              TABLE 3                                                     
______________________________________                                    
                Remaining                                                 
                amount of  Bleach                                         
                silver     fogging  Increase in                           
No.  Compound   [μg/cm.sup.2 ]                                         
                           ΔDmin (G)                                
                                    stain ΔD (G)                    
______________________________________                                    
301  Comparative                                                          
                2.8        0.00     0.12                                  
     Compound A                                                           
302  Comparative                                                          
                11.6       0.03     0.04                                  
     Compound B                                                           
303  Comparative                                                          
                11.4       0.04     0.03                                  
     Compound C                                                           
304  Present    0.1        0.01     0.01                                  
     Compound 3                                                           
305  Present    0.2        0.01     0.03                                  
     Compound 4                                                           
306  Present    0.3        0.02     0.03                                  
     Compound 5                                                           
307  Present    0.9        0.01     0.03                                  
     Compound 8                                                           
308  Present    1.0        0.01     0.02                                  
     Compound 11                                                          
309  Present    0.6        0.00     0.02                                  
     Compound 19                                                          
310  Present    0.7        0.00     0.04                                  
     Compound 21                                                          
311  Present    0.8        0.01     0.04                                  
     Compound 29                                                          
______________________________________                                    
 (Note: Specimens 301 to 303 are comparative while the others are accordin
 to the present invention)                                                
 Comparative Compound A: Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid                  
 Comparative Compound B: 1,3Diaminopropanetetraacetic acid                
 Comparative Compound C: 1,4Diaminobutanetetraacetic acid
The results set forth in Table 3 show that as compared to the blix solutions comprising the comparative compounds the blix solution having a bleaching capacity comprising the chelate compounds of the present invention can reduce the remaining amount of silver and cause little bleach fogging and little increase in stain after processing. The blix solution comprising Comparative Compound B exhibits a sufficient bleach capacity shortly after being prepared, but shows a rapid drop in the bleaching capacity and a remarkable stain in the solution after running. On the contrary, the blix solutions comprising the metal chelate compounds of the present invention cause little stain and remain stable.
EXAMPLE 4
The light-sensitive material specimen as prepared in Example 3 was stepwise exposed to light (color temperature of light source: 3,200° K.) through an optical wedge, and then processed with the following processing solutions in the following processing steps.
The remaining amount of silver on the maximum density portion was measured by fluorescent x-ray analysis. The blue density on the minimum density portion was also measured. The specimen was then stored at a temperature of 80° C. and a relative humidity of 70% for 8 days to determine the amount of stain with time.
______________________________________                                    
Processing Step                                                           
             Temperature    Time                                          
______________________________________                                    
Color        40° C.  15 sec.                                       
development                                                               
Blix         30-35° C.                                             
                            (1) 20 sec.                                   
                            (2) 10 sec.                                   
Rinse 1      "              7 sec.                                        
Rinse 2      "              7 sec.                                        
Rinse 3      "              7 sec.                                        
Rinse 4      "              7 sec.                                        
Drying       70-80° C.                                             
                            15 sec.                                       
______________________________________
The rinse step is effected in a 4-tank countercurrent process wherein the washing water flows from (4) to (1).
The various processing solutions had the following compositions:
Color Developer 
______________________________________                                    
Water                     700    ml                                       
Diethylenetriaminopentaacetic acid                                        
                          0.4    g                                        
N,N,N-tris(methylenephosphonic acid)                                      
                          4.0    g                                        
1-Hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphonic                                      
                          0.4    g                                        
acid                                                                      
Triethanolamine           12.0   g                                        
Potassium chloride        4.9    g                                        
Potassium bromide         0.015  g                                        
Potassium carbonate       29     g                                        
Fluorescent brightening agent                                             
                          1.0    g                                        
(WHITEX 4B, available from                                                
Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.)                                              
Sodium sulfite            0.1    g                                        
N,N-bis(sulfoethyl)hydroxylamine                                          
                          12.0   g                                        
N-ethyl-N-(β-methanesulfonamido-                                     
                          10.5   g                                        
ethyl)-3-methyl-4-aminoaniline                                            
sulfate                                                                   
Water to make             1,000  ml                                       
pH (25° C.)        10.15                                           
______________________________________
Blix Solution 
______________________________________                                    
Water                   400    ml                                         
Ammonium thiosulfate (700 g/l)                                            
                        100    ml                                         
Ammonium sulfite        15     g                                          
Compound as set forth in Table 4*                                         
                        0.21   mol                                        
Ferric nitrate nonahydrate*                                               
                        0.19   mol                                        
Ammonium bromide        40     g                                          
Water to make           1,000  ml                                         
pH (25° C.)      6.2                                               
______________________________________                                    
 (Note: The compound with symbol * was used in the form of solution in 200
 ml of water)
Rinse Solution
Ion-exchanged water (calcium and magnesium concentrations: not more than 3 ppm each)
                                  TABLE 4                                 
__________________________________________________________________________
                     Remaining                                            
                 Bleach                                                   
                     amount                                               
                           Bleach                                         
                                 Stain                                    
   Metal chelate time                                                     
                     of silver                                            
                           fogging                                        
                                 with time                                
No.                                                                       
   compound*     (sec.)                                                   
                     (μg/cm.sup.2)                                     
                           ΔDmin (G)                                
                                 ΔDmin (G)                          
                                       Remarks                            
__________________________________________________________________________
401                                                                       
   Comparative Compound D                                                 
                 20  5.1   0.01  0.24  Comparative                        
                 10  9.9   0.01  0.28  Comparative                        
402                                                                       
   Comparative Compound E                                                 
                 20  3.3   0.09  0.19  Comparative                        
                 10  6.2   0.07  0.22  Comparative                        
403                                                                       
   Comparative Compound F                                                 
                 20  3.0   0.03  0.31  Comparative                        
                 10  5.8   0.02  0.42  Comparative                        
404                                                                       
   Present Compound K-3                                                   
                 20  0.7   0.02  0.05  Present Invention                  
                 10  1.2   0.02  0.06  Present Invention                  
405                                                                       
   Present Compound K-4                                                   
                 20  0.9   0.02  0.05  Present Invention                  
                 10  1.4   0.02  0.08  Present Invention                  
406                                                                       
   Present Compound K-8                                                   
                 20  2.0   0.02  0.07  Present Invention                  
                 10  3.3   0.01  0.09  Present Invention                  
407                                                                       
   Present Compound K-19                                                  
                 20  1.1   0.01  0.07  Present Invention                  
                 10  1.9   0.01  0.09  Present Invention                  
408                                                                       
   Present Compound K-21                                                  
                 20  1.0   0.02  0.07  Present Invention                  
                 10  1.7   0.01  0.08  Present Invention                  
__________________________________________________________________________
Table 4 shows that as compared to the comparative blix solutions the blix solutions comprising the present compounds exhibit excellent desilvering properties and cause little bleach fogging and little stain with time.
EXAMPLE 5
A multilayer color light-sensitive material was prepared as Specimen 501 by coating on a undercoated cellulose triacetate film support various layers having the following compositions.
Composition of Photographic Layer
The coated amount of silver halide and colloidal silver is represented in g/m2 calculated in terms of the amount of silver. The coated amount of couplers, additives and gelatin is represented in g/m2. The coated amount of sensitizing dye is represented in mol per mol of silver halide contained in the same layer.
__________________________________________________________________________
1st Layer: anti-halation layer                                            
Black colloidal silver           0.2                                      
Gelatin                          2.2                                      
UV-1                             0.1                                      
UV-2                             0.2                                      
Cpd-1                            0.05                                     
Solv-1                           0.01                                     
Solv-2                           0.01                                     
Solv-3                           0.08                                     
2nd Layer: interlayer                                                     
Finely divided silver bromide grains                                      
                                 0.15                                     
(diameter: 0.07 μm as calculated                                       
in terms of sphere) (coated                                               
silver amount)                                                            
Gelatin                          1.0                                      
Cpd-2                            0.2                                      
3rd layer: 1st red-sensitive emulsion layer                               
Silver bromoiodide emulsion      0.26                                     
(AgI content: 10.0 mol %; high                                            
internal AgI type; diameter: 0.7 μm                                    
(as calculated in terms of sphere);                                       
coefficient of fluctuation in grain                                       
diameter: 14% (as calculated in terms                                     
of sphere); tetradecahedral grains)                                       
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Silver bromoiodide emulsion      0.2                                      
(AgI content: 4.0 mole %; high                                            
internal AgI type; diameter: 0.4 μm                                    
(as calculated in terms of sphere);                                       
coefficient of fluctuation in grain                                       
diameter: 22% (as calculated in terms                                     
of sphere); tetradecahedral grains)                                       
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                          1.0                                      
ExS-1                            4.5 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExS-2                            1.5 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExS-3                            0.4 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExS-4                            0.3 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExC-1                            0.15                                     
ExC-7                            0.15                                     
ExC-2                            0.009                                    
ExC-3                            0.023                                    
ExC-6                            0.14                                     
4th Layer: 2nd red-sensitive emulsion layer                               
Silver bromoiodide emulsion      0.55                                     
(AgI content: 16 mol %; high                                              
internal AgI type; diameter: 1.0 μm                                    
(as calculated in terms of sphere);                                       
coefficient of fluctuation in grain                                       
diameter: 25% (as calculated in terms                                     
of sphere); tabtular grains;                                              
diameter/thickness ratio: 4.0)                                            
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                          0.7                                      
ExS-1                            3 × 10.sup.-4 mol                  
ExS-2                            1 × 10.sup.-4 mol                  
ExS-3                            0.3 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExS-4                            0.3 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExC-3                            0.05                                     
ExC-4                            0.10                                     
ExC-6                            0.08                                     
5th Layer: 3rd red-sensitive emulsion layer                               
Silver bromoiodide emulsion      0.9                                      
(AgI content: 10.0 mol %; high                                            
internal AgI type; diameter: 1.2 μm                                    
(as calculated in terms of sphere);                                       
coefficient of fluctuation in grain                                       
diameter: 28% (as calculated in terms                                     
of sphere); tabtular grains;                                              
diameter/thickness ratio: 6.0)                                            
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                          0.6                                      
ExS-1                            2 × 10.sup.-4 mol                  
ExS-2                            0.6 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExS-3                            0.2 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExC-4                            0.07                                     
ExC-5                            0.06                                     
Solv-1                           0.12                                     
Solv-2                           0.12                                     
6th Layer: interlayer                                                     
Gelatin                          1.0                                      
Cpd-4                            0.1                                      
7th Layer: 1st green-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Silver bromoiodide emulsion      0.2                                      
(AgI content: 10.0 mol %; high                                            
internal AgI type; diameter: 0.7 μm                                    
(as calculated in terms of sphere);                                       
coefficient of fluctuation in grain                                       
diameter: 14% (as calculated in terms                                     
of sphere); tetradecahtedral grains)                                      
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Silver bromoiodide emulsion      0.1                                      
(AgI content: 14.0 mol %; high                                            
internal AgI type; diameter: 0.4 μm                                    
(as calculated in terms of sphere);                                       
coefficient of fluctuation in grain                                       
diameter: 22% (as calculated in terms                                     
of sphere); tetradecahtedral grains)                                      
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                          1.2                                      
ExS-5                            5 × 10.sup.-4 mol                  
ExS-6                            2 × 10.sup.-4 mol                  
ExS-7                            1 × 10.sup.-4 mol                  
ExM-1                            0.20                                     
ExM-6                            0.25                                     
ExM-2                            0.10                                     
ExM-5                            0.03                                     
Solv-1                           0.40                                     
Solv-4                           0.03                                     
8th Layer: 2nd green-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Silver bromoiodide emulsion      0.4                                      
(AgI content: 10.0 mol %; high                                            
internal iodine type; diameter:                                           
1.0 μm (as calculated in terms                                         
of sphere); coefficient of fluctuation                                    
in grain diameter: 25% (as calculated                                     
in terms of sphere); tabular grains;                                      
diameter/thickness ratio: 3.0)                                            
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                          0.35                                     
ExS-5                            3.5 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExS-6                            1.4 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExS-7                            0.7 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExM-1                            0.09                                     
ExM-3                            0.01                                     
Solv-1                           0.15                                     
Solv-4                           0.03                                     
9th Layer: interlayer                                                     
Gelatin                          0.5                                      
10th Layer: 3rd green-sensitive emulsion layer                            
Silver bromoiodide emulsion      1.0                                      
(AgI content: 10.0 mol %; high                                            
internal AgI type; diameter: 1.2 μm                                    
(as calculated in terms of sphere);                                       
coefficient of fluctuation in grain                                       
diameter: 28% (as calculated in terms                                     
of sphere); tabular grains; diameter/                                     
thickness ratio: 6.0) (coated silver                                      
amount)                                                                   
Gelatin                          0.8                                      
ExS-5                            2 × 10.sup.-4 mol                  
ExS-6                            0.8 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExS-7                            0.8 × 10.sup.-4 mol                
ExM-3                            0.01                                     
ExM-4                            0.04                                     
ExC-4                            0.005                                    
Solv-1                           0.02                                     
11th Layer: yellow filter layer                                           
Cpd-3                            0.05                                     
Gelatin                          0.5                                      
Solv-1                           0.1                                      
12th Layer: interlayer                                                    
Gelatin                          0.5                                      
Cpd-2                            0.1                                      
13th Layer: 1st blue-sensitive layer                                      
Silver bromoiodide emulsion      0.1                                      
(AgI content: 10 mol %; high                                              
internal iodine type; diameter:                                           
0.7 μm (as calculated in terms of                                      
sphere); coefficient of fluctuation                                       
in grain diameter: 14% (as                                                
calculated in terms of sphere);                                           
tetradecahedral grains) (coated silver                                    
amount)                                                                   
Silver bromoiodide emulsion      0.05                                     
(AgI content: 4.0 mol %; high                                             
internal iodine type; diameter:                                           
0.4 μm (as calculated in terms                                         
of sphere); coefficient of fluctuation                                    
in grain diameter: 22% (as calculated                                     
in terms of sphere); tetradecahedral                                      
grains) (coated silver amount)                                            
Gelatin                          1.0                                      
ExS-8                            3 × 10.sup.-4 mol                  
ExY-1                            0.25                                     
ExY-3                            0.32                                     
ExY-2                            0.02                                     
Solv-1                           0.20                                     
14th Layer: 2nd blue-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Silver bromoiodide emulsion      0.19                                     
(AgI content: 19.0 mol %; high                                            
internal AgI type; diameter: 1.0 μm                                    
(as calculated in terms of sphere);                                       
coefficient of fluctuation in grain                                       
diameter: 16% (as calculated in terms                                     
of sphere); tetradecahedral grains)                                       
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                          0.3                                      
ExS-8                            2 × 10.sup.-4 mol                  
ExY-1                            0.22                                     
Solv-1                           0.07                                     
15th Layer: interlayer                                                    
Finely divided silver bromoiodide                                         
                                 0.2                                      
(AgI content: 2 mol %; uniform                                            
type; grain diameter: 0.13 μm as                                       
calculated in terms of sphere)                                            
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                          0.36                                     
16th layer: 3rd blue-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI 1.0                                      
content: 14.0 mol %; high internal                                        
AgI type: grain diameter: 1.5 μm as                                    
calculated in terms of sphere;                                            
coefficient of fluctuation in grain                                       
diameter: 28% as calculated in terms                                      
of sphere); tabular grains; diameter/                                     
thickness ratio: 5.0) (coated silver                                      
amount                                                                    
Gelatin                          0.5                                      
ExS-8                            1.5 × 10.sup.-4                    
ExY-1                            0.2                                      
Solv-1                           0.07                                     
17th layer: 1st protective layer                                          
Gelatin                          1.8                                      
UV-1                             0.1                                      
UV-2                             0.2                                      
Solv-1                           0.01                                     
Solv-2                           0.01                                     
18th layer: 2nd protective layer                                          
Finely divided silver bromide    0.18                                     
grains (grain diameter: 0.07 μm                                        
as calculated in terms of sphere)                                         
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                          0.7                                      
Polymethyl methacrylate grains   0.2                                      
(grain diameter: 1.5 μm)                                               
W-1                              0.02                                     
H-1                              0.4                                      
Cpd-5                            1.0                                      
__________________________________________________________________________
 ##STR62##                                                                
 ##STR63##                                                                
 ##STR64##                                                                
 ##STR65##                                                                
 ##STR66##                                                                
 ##STR67##                                                                
 ##STR68##                                                                
 ##STR69##                                                                
 ##STR70##                                                                
 ##STR71##                                                                
 ##STR72##                                                                
 ##STR73##                                                                
 ##STR74##                                                                
 ##STR75##                                                                
 ##STR76##                                                                
 ##STR77##                                                                
 ##STR78##                                                                
 ##STR79##                                                                
 ##STR80##                                                                
 ##STR81##                                                                
 ##STR82##                                                                
 ##STR83##                                                                
 ##STR84##                                                                
 ##STR85##                                                                
 ##STR86##                                                                
 ##STR87##                                                                
 ##STR88##                                                                
 ##STR89##                                                                
 ##STR90##                                                                
 ##STR91##                                                                
 ##STR92##                                                                
 ##STR93##                                                                
 ##STR94##                                                                
 ##STR95##                                                                
 ##STR96##                                                                
 ##STR97##                                                                
 ##STR98##                                                                
           The specimen thus prepared was cut into 35-m wide strips,      
worked, wedgewise exposed to white light (color temperature of light      
source: 4,800° K.), and then processed by means of a processing    
machine for motion picture in the following process. For the evaluation   
of properties, another specimen imagewise exposed to light was processed  
after the accumulated replenishment of the color developer reached three
For the aeration of the bleaching solution, the bleaching bath was provided at the bottom thereof with a pipe having a large number of 0.2-mmφ pores through which air was supplied at a rate of 200 ml/minute.
______________________________________                                    
Processing step                                                           
                     Temper-  Replenish-                                  
                                      Tank                                
Step     Time        ature    ment rate*                                  
                                      capacity                            
______________________________________                                    
Color    3 min.  15 sec. 37.8° C.                                  
                                23 ml   10 l                              
development                                                               
Bleaching        50 sec. 38.0° C.                                  
                                 5 ml   5 l                               
Fixing   1 min.  40 sec. 38.0° C.                                  
                                30 ml   10 l                              
Washing (1)      30 sec. 38.0° C.                                  
                                --      5 l                               
Washing (2)      20 sec. 38.0° C.                                  
                                30 ml   5 l                               
Stabilization    20 sec. 38.0° C.                                  
                                20 ml   5 l                               
Drying   1 min.            55° C.                                  
______________________________________                                    
 *Determined per 35mm width and 1m length
The washing step was effected in a countercurrent process wherein the washing water flows from (2) to (1). The amount of the developer brought over to the bleaching step, and the amount of the fixing solution brought over to the washing step were 2.5 ml, and 2.0 ml per m of 35-mm wide light-sensitive material respectively.
The time for crossover was 5 seconds in all the steps. This crossover time is included in the processing time at the previous step.
The various processing solutions had the following compositions:
Color Developer 
______________________________________                                    
                  Mother                                                  
                  Solution                                                
                         Replenisher                                      
______________________________________                                    
Diethylenetriamine- 1.0 g    1.1 g                                        
pentaacetic acid                                                          
1-Hydroxyethylidene-                                                      
                    3.0 g    3.2 g                                        
1,1-diphosphonic acid                                                     
Sodium sulfite      4.0 g    4.9 g                                        
Potassium carbonate 30.0 g   30.0 g                                       
Potassium bromide   1.4 g    --                                           
Potassium iodide    1.5 mg   --                                           
Hydroxylamine sulfate                                                     
                    2.4 g    3.6 g                                        
4-[N-ethyl-N-(β-hydroxyethyl)-                                       
                    4.5 g    6.4 g                                        
amino]-2-methylaniline sulfate                                            
Water to make       1.0 l    1.0 l                                        
pH                  10.05    10.10                                        
______________________________________
Bleaching Solution 
______________________________________                                    
               Mother                                                     
               Solution  Replenisher                                      
______________________________________                                    
Iron nitrate     0.20   mol      0.30 mol                                 
Chelate compound as                                                       
                 0.31   mol      0.47 mol                                 
set fourth in Table 5                                                     
Ammonium bromide 100    g        150  g                                   
Ammoniun nitrate 20     g        30   g                                   
Glycolic acid    55     g        83   g                                   
Water to make    1.0    l        1.0  l                                   
pH               5.0             5.0                                      
______________________________________
The chelating compound used is an organic acid constituting a ferric ammonium salt of organic acid to be incorporated in the bleaching agent.
Fixing Solution 
______________________________________                                    
                Mother                                                    
                Solution                                                  
                       Replenisher                                        
______________________________________                                    
Disodium ethylenediamine-                                                 
                  1.7    g     Same as left                               
tetraacetate                                                              
Ammonium sulfite  14.0   g     "                                          
Aqueous solution of                                                       
                  260.0  ml    "                                          
ammonium thiosulfate                                                      
(700 g/l)                                                                 
Water to make     1.0    l     "                                          
pH                7.0                                                     
______________________________________
Washing Solution (The Mother Solution Was Used Also As Replenisher)
Tap water was passed through a mixed bed column packed with an H-type strongly acidic cation exchange resin (Amberlite IR-120B available from Rohm & Haas) and an OH-type strongly basic anion exchange resin (Amberlite IRA-400 available from the same company) so that the calcium and magnesium ion concentrations were each reduced to 3 mg/l or less. Dichlorinated sodium isocyanurate and sodium sulfate were then added to the solution in amounts of 20 mg/l and 150 mg/l, respectively.
The washing solution thus obtained had a pH value of 6.5 to 7.5.
Stabilizing Solution
(The mother solution was used also as replenisher)
______________________________________                                    
Formalin (37%)           1.2 ml                                           
Surface active agent     0.4                                              
 ##STR99##                                                                
Ethylene glycol          1.0                                              
Water to make            1.0 l                                            
pH                       5.0-7.0                                          
______________________________________
The photographic light-sensitive material specimens thus processed were then measured for the remaining amount of silver on the maximum color density portion by means of a fluorescent X-ray analyzer. The results are set forth in Table 5.
These photographic light-sensitive material specimens were also measured for density. Dmin values measured by green light were read from the characteristic curve.
The same specimens were processed in the same manner as above except that they were processed with the following reference bleaching solution causing no bleach fogging at a temperature of 38° C. at a replenishment rate of 25 ml/35 mm width and 1 m length for 390 seconds.
Reference Bleaching Solution 
______________________________________                                    
                Mother                                                    
                Solution Replenisher                                      
______________________________________                                    
Ferric sodium ethylenedi-                                                 
                  100.0  g       120.0                                    
                                      g                                   
aminetetraacetate                                                         
trihydrate                                                                
Disodium ethylenediamine-                                                 
                  10.0   g       11.0 g                                   
tetraacetate                                                              
Ammonium bromide  100    g       120  g                                   
Ammonium nitrate  30.0   g       35.0 g                                   
Aqueous ammonia (27%)                                                     
                  6.5    ml      4.0  ml                                  
Water to make     1.0    l       1.0  l                                   
pH                6.0            5.7                                      
______________________________________
The specimens thus processed were measured for density in the same manner as described above. Dmin values were read from the characteristic curve.
The difference (Δmin) in Dmin of the specimens from that obtained by using the reference bleaching solution were determined. Dmin value obtained by the reference bleaching solution was 0.60. ##EQU1##
The results are set forth in Table 5.
These specimens were also measured for increase in fogging during the storage after processing. For this measurement, these specimens were stored under a wet heat condition (60° C., 70% RH) in a dark place for 4 weeks. The change in Dmin on noncolored portion between before and after storage was determined.
Increase in fogging (ΔD)=(Dmin after storage)-(Dmin before storage)
The results are set forth in Table 5.
              TABLE 5                                                     
______________________________________                                    
                 Remaining    Bleach  Increase                            
      Chelate    amount of silver                                         
                              fogging in stain                            
No.   compound   [μg/cm.sup.2 ]                                        
                              ΔDmin (G)                             
                                      ΔD (G)                        
______________________________________                                    
501   Comparative                                                         
                 25.8         0.00    0.21                                
      Compound A                                                          
502   Comparative                                                         
                 7.2          0.14    0.10                                
      Compound B                                                          
503   Comparative                                                         
                 10.8         0.09    0.18                                
      Compound C                                                          
504   Comparative                                                         
                 6.2          0.18    0.11                                
      Compound D                                                          
505   Comparative                                                         
                 6.3          0.15    0.11                                
      Compound E                                                          
506   Present    4.8          0.01    0.03                                
      Compound 51                                                         
507   Present    4.4          0.05    0.03                                
      Compound 52                                                         
508   Present    4.2          0.02    0.03                                
      Compound 54                                                         
509   Present    4.2          0.02    0.03                                
      Compound 56                                                         
510   Present    4.0          0.03    0.04                                
      Compound 61                                                         
511   Present    5.8          0.00    0.02                                
      Compound 64                                                         
512   Present    5.0          0.06    0.05                                
      Compound 67                                                         
513   Present    4.0          0.02    0.03                                
      Compound 70                                                         
514   Present    5.5          0.01    0.03                                
      Compound 75                                                         
515   Present    5.2          0.01    0.03                                
      Compound 77                                                         
516   Present    5.2          0.02    0.04                                
      Compound 81                                                         
517   Present    4.8          0.03    0.03                                
      Compound 91                                                         
518   Present    4.9          0.03    0.04                                
      Compound 92                                                         
______________________________________                                    
 (Note: Specimens 501 to 505 are comparative while the others are accordin
 to the present invention)                                                
 Comparative Compound A                                                   
 ##STR100##                                                               
 Comparative Compound B                                                   
 ##STR101##                                                               
 Comparative Compound C                                                   
 ##STR102##                                                               
 Comparative Compound D                                                   
 ##STR103##                                                               
 Comparative Compound E                                                   
 ##STR104##
The results set forth in Table 1 show that as compared to the comparative compounds the present compounds are capable of reducing the remaining amount of silver while contributing to eliminating bleach fogging and stain during the storage of dye images after processing.
EXAMPLE 6
Specimen 311 described in JP-A-2-28637 was processed in accordance with the following steps:
______________________________________                                    
Processing step                                                           
                         Temper-                                          
                                Replenish-                                
                                        Tank                              
Step     Time            ature  ment rate*                                
                                        capacity                          
______________________________________                                    
Color    1 min. 45 sec.  43° C.                                    
                                25 ml   10 l                              
development                                                               
Bleach   20 sec.         40° C.                                    
                                 5 ml   4 l                               
Blix     20 sec.         40° C.                                    
                                --      4 l                               
Fixing   20 sec.         40° C.                                    
                                16 ml   4 l                               
Washing (1)                                                               
         20 sec.         40° C.                                    
                                --      2 l                               
Washing (2)                                                               
         10 sec.         40° C.                                    
                                30 ml   2 l                               
Stabilization                                                             
         10 sec.         40° C.                                    
                                20 ml   2 l                               
Drying   1 min.          60° C.                                    
______________________________________                                    
 *Determined per 35mm width and 1m length
The washing step was effected in a countercurrent process wherein the washing water flows from (2) to (1). The overflow solution from the bleaching bath was all introduced into the blix bath.
Furthermore, the overflow solution from the washing tank (1) was all introduced into the fixing bath, and the overflow solution of fixing bath was all introduced into the blix bath.
The amount of the fixing solution brought over to the washing step was 2.0 ml per m of 35-mm wide light- sensitive material.
The composition of the various processing solutions used were as follows:
Color Developer 
______________________________________                                    
                Mother                                                    
                Solution                                                  
                       Replenisher                                        
______________________________________                                    
Diethylenetriamine-                                                       
                  2.0 g    2.0 g                                          
pentaacetic acid                                                          
1-Hydroxyethylidene-                                                      
                  3.0 g    3.2 g                                          
1,1-diphosphonic acid                                                     
Sodium sulfite    4.0 g    5.8 g                                          
Potassium carbonate                                                       
                  40.0 g   40.0 g                                         
Potassium bromide 1.3 g    --                                             
Potassium iodide  1.5 ml   --                                             
Hydroxylamine sulfate                                                     
                  2.4 g    3.6 g                                          
2-Methyl-4-[N-ethyl-N-                                                    
                  9.2 g    13.4 g                                         
(β-hydroxyethyl)amino]-                                              
aniline sulfate                                                           
Water to make     1.0 l    1.0 l                                          
pH adjusted with 50%                                                      
                  10.20    10.35                                          
potassium hydroxide                                                       
______________________________________
Bleaching Solution 
______________________________________                                    
               Mother                                                     
               Solution  Replenisher                                      
______________________________________                                    
Chelate compound 0.30   mol      0.42 mol                                 
set forth in Table 6                                                      
Iron nitrate     0.27   mol      0.38 mol                                 
Ammonium bromide 100    g        140  g                                   
Ammonium nitrate 17.5   g        25.0 g                                   
Water to make    1.0    l        1.0  l                                   
pH               4.5             4.5                                      
______________________________________
Fixing Solution 
______________________________________                                    
                 Mother                                                   
                 Solution Replenisher                                     
______________________________________                                    
Aqueous solution of                                                       
                   280    ml      840  ml                                 
ammonium thiosulfate                                                      
(700 g/l)                                                                 
Ethylenediaminetetraacetic                                                
                   12,6   g       38   g                                  
acid                                                                      
Ammonium sulfite   27.5   g       82.5 g                                  
Imidazole          28     g       84   g                                  
Water to make      1      l       1    l                                  
pH                 7.8            8.0                                     
______________________________________
Blix Solution
5:16:30 mixture (by volume) of bleaching solution, fixing solution and washing solution
Washing Solution
Same as in Example 5
Stabilizing Solution
(The mother solution was used also as replenisher)
______________________________________                                    
Formalin (37%)            2.0 ml                                          
Polyoxyethylene-p-monononylphenylether                                    
                          0.3                                             
(average polymerization degree: 10)                                       
Disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate                                      
                          0.05                                            
Water to make             1.0 l                                           
pH                        5.0-8.0                                         
______________________________________
The specimens thus processed were measured for density in the same manner as described above. Dmix values measured by green light were read from the characteristic curve.
On the other hand, Specimen 311 as described in JP-A-2-28637 was processed with the same reference bleaching solution as used in Example 5, and then measured for Dmin in the same manner as described above. Bleach fogging and Dmin were calculated on the basis of the Dmin value of the reference bleaching solution in the same manner as in Example 5. The reference bleaching solution had a Dmix value of 0.57. The results are set forth in Table 6.
Another batch of the specimens thus processed were evaluated for stain during the storage of dye images after processing in the same manner as in Example 5. The results are set forth in Table 6.
Another batch of these specimens were exposed to light in such a manner that the grey density thus developed reached 1.5, processed in the same manner as described above, and then measured for the remaining amount of silver by fluorescent X-ray process. The results are set forth in Table 6.
              TABLE 6                                                     
______________________________________                                    
                 Remaining                                                
                 amount of   Bleach  Increase                             
      Chelate    silver      fogging in stain                             
No.   compound   [μg/cm.sup.2 ]                                        
                             ΔDmin (G)                              
                                     ΔD (G)                         
______________________________________                                    
601   Comparative                                                         
                 35.0        0.03    0.23                                 
      Compound A                                                          
602   Comparative                                                         
                 7.2         0.26    0.16                                 
      Compound B                                                          
603   Comparative                                                         
                 12.8        0.08    0.18                                 
      Compound C                                                          
604   Comparative                                                         
                 6.0         0.27    0.17                                 
      Compound D                                                          
605   Comparative                                                         
                 6.2         0.23    0.17                                 
      Compound E                                                          
606   Present    3.6         0.01    0.01                                 
      Compound 51                                                         
607   Present    3.3         0.04    0.02                                 
      Compound 57                                                         
608   Present    3.2         0.02    0.03                                 
      Compound 54                                                         
609   Present    3.2         0.02    0.03                                 
      Compound 56                                                         
610   Present    3.0         0.03    0.03                                 
      Compound 61                                                         
611   Present    5.2         0.00    0.02                                 
      Compound 64                                                         
612   Present    3.7         0.05    0.04                                 
      Compound 67                                                         
613   Present    3.8         0.03    0.03                                 
      Compound 70                                                         
614   Present    4.0         0.01    0.02                                 
      Compound 75                                                         
615   Present    3.7         0.01    0.02                                 
      Compound 77                                                         
616   Present    3.9         0.02    0.03                                 
      Compound 81                                                         
617   Present    3.5         0.02    0.03                                 
      Compound 91                                                         
518   Present    3.6         0.03    0.03                                 
      Compound                                                            
______________________________________                                    
 (Note: Specimens 601 to 605 are comparative while the others are accordin
 to the present invention)
Comparative Compounds A, B, C, D and E used were as used in Example 5. Table 6 shows that as compared to the comparative compounds the present compounds are capable of reducing the remainining amount of silver while contributing to eliminating bleach fogging and stain during the storage of dye images after processing.
EXAMPLE 7
A multilayer color photographic paper specimen was prepared by coating on a polyethylene both side-laminated paper support which had been corona-discharged and then provided with a gelatin subbing layer containing sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate various photographic constiuent layers having the following compositions. The coating solutions for these layers were prepared as follows:
Coating Liquid for 1st Layer
19.1 g of a yellow coupler (ExY), 4.4 g of a dye image stabilizer (Cpd-1) and 0.7 g of a dye image stabilizer (Cpd-7) were dissolved in 27.2 ml of ethyl acetate, 4.1 g of a solvent (Solv-3) and 4.1 g of a solvent (Solv-7). The solution thus obtained was then emulsion-dispersed in 185 ml of a 10% aqueous solution of gelatin containing 8 ml of 10% sodium dodecylbenzensulfonate to prepare Emulsion Dispersion A. On the other hand, a silver bromochloride emulsion A (3:7 mixture (ratio of molar amount of silver) of a large size emulsion A of cubic grains with a mean grain size of 0.88 μm and a grain size distribution fluctuation coefficient of 0.08 and a small size emulsion A of cubic grains with a mean grain size of 0.70 m and a grain size distribution fluctuation coefficient of 0.10, both having 0.3 mol % silver bromide localized on the surface thereof) was prepared by incorporating the blue-sensitive sensitizing dyes A and B as described later in amounts of 2.0×10-4 mol and 2.5×10-4 mol based on mol of silver in the large size emulsion A and the small size emulsion B, respectively. For the chemical sensitization of these emulsions a sulfur sensitizer and a gold sensitizer were used. Emulsion Dispersion A and Silver Bromochloride Emulsion A were then mixed and dissolved to prepare a coating solution for the 1st layer having the following composition.
Coating solutions for the 2nd to 7th layers were prepared in the same manner as in the 1st layer coating solution. There was incorporated in each layer a sodium salt of 1-oxy-3,5-dichloro-s-triazine as gelatin hardener.
To each of these layers were added Cpd-10 and Cpd-11 in amounts of 25.0 mg/m2 and 50.0 mg/m2, respectively.
In the silver bromochloride emulsion for each light-sensitive emulsion layer were incorporated the following spectral sensitizing dyes: ##STR105##
(2.0×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide in the large size emulsion A and 2.5×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide in the small size emulsion A) ##STR106##
(4.0×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide in the large size emulsion B and 5.6×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide in the small size emulsion B) ##STR107##
(7.0×10-5 mol per mol of silver halide in the large size emulsion B and 1.0×10-5 mol per mol of silver halide in the small size emulsion B) ##STR108##
(0.9×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide in the large size emulsion C and 1.1×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide in the small size emulsion C)
In the red-sensitive emulsion layer was incorporated the following compound in an amount of 2.6×10-3 mol per mol of silver halide: ##STR109##
In the blue-sensitive emulsion layer, the green-sensitive emulsion layer and the red-sensitive emulsion layer was incorporated 1-(5-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole in amounts of 8.5×10-5 mol, 7.7×10-4 mol and 2.5×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide.
In the blue-sensitive emulsion layer and the green-sensitive emulsion layer was incorporated 4-hydroxy-6-methyl-1,3,3a,7-tetrazaindene in amounts of 1×10-4 mol and 2×10-4 mol per mol of silver halide.
In order to inhibit irradiation, the following dyes were incorporated in these emulsion layers (figure in parenthesis indicates coated amount). ##STR110##
Layer Structure
The composition of these layers will be set forth below. The figure indicate coated amount in g/m2. The coated amount of silver halide emulsion is represented as calculated in terms of amount of silver.
Support
Polyethylene-laminated paper [containing a white pigment (TiO2) and a bluish dye (ultramarine) on the 1st layer side]
__________________________________________________________________________
1st layer: blue-sensitive emulsion layer                                  
Silver bromochloride emulsion A as set forth above                        
                                         0.30                             
Gelatin                                  1.86                             
Yellow Coupler (ExY)                     0.82                             
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-1)             0.19                             
Solvent (Solv-3)                         0.18                             
Solvent (Solv-7)                         0.18                             
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-7)             0.06                             
2nd layer: color mixing inhibiting layer                                  
Gelatin                                  0.99                             
Color mixing inhibiting agent (Cpd-5)    0.08                             
Solvent (Solv-1)                         0.16                             
Solvent (Solv-4)                         0.08                             
3rd layer: green-sensitive emulsion layer                                 
Silver bromochloride emulsion (1:3 mixture (ratio of molar amount of      
silver) of a large                       0.12                             
size emulsion B of cubic grains with a mean grain size of 0.55 μm and  
a grain size                                                              
distribution fluctuation coefficient of 0.10 and a small size emulsion B  
of cubic grains                                                           
with a mean grain size of 0.39 μm and a grain size distribution        
fluctuation coefficient                                                   
of 0.08, both having 0.8 mol % silver bromide localized on the surface    
thereof)                                                                  
Gelatin                                  1.24                             
Magenta coupler (ExM)                    0.23                             
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-2)             0.03                             
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-3)             0.16                             
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-4)             0.02                             
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-9)             0.02                             
Solvent (Solv-2)                         0.40                             
4th layer: ultraviolet-absorbing layer                                    
Gelatin                                  1.58                             
Ultraviolet absorbent (UV-1)             0.47                             
Color mixing inhibitor (Cpd-5)           0.05                             
Solvent (Solv-5)                         0.24                             
5th layer: red-sensitive emulsion layer                                   
Silver bromochloride emulsion (1:4 mixture (ratio of molar amount of      
silver) of a large                       0.23                             
size emulsion C of cubic grains with a mean grain size of 0.58 μm and  
a grain size                                                              
distribution fluctuation coefficient of 0.09 and a small size emulsion C  
of cubic grains                                                           
with a mean grain size of 0.45 μm and a grain size distribution        
fluctuation coefficient                                                   
of 0.11, both having 0.6 mol % silver bromide localized on the surface    
thereof)                                                                  
Gelatin                                  1.34                             
Cyan coupler (ExC)                       0.32                             
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-2)             0.03                             
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-4)             0.02                             
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-6)             0.18                             
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-7)             0.40                             
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-8)             0.05                             
Solvent (Solv-6)                         0.14                             
6th layer: ultraviolet-absorbing layer                                    
Gelatin                                  0.53                             
Ultraviolet absorbent (UV-1)             0.16                             
Color mixing inhibitor (Cpd-5)           0.02                             
Solvent (Solv-5)                         0.08                             
7th layer: protective layer                                               
Gelatin                                  1.33                             
Acryl-modified copolymer of polyvinyl alcohol (modification degree:       
                                         0.17                             
Liquid paraffin                          0.03                             
__________________________________________________________________________
Yellow coupler (ExY)                                                      
1:1 Mixture (molar ratio) of                                              
 ##STR111##                                                               
 ##STR112##                                                               
and                                                                       
 ##STR113##                                                               
Magenta coupler (ExM)                                                     
 ##STR114##                                                               
Cyan coupler (ExC)                                                        
1:1 (molar ratio) mixture of:                                             
 ##STR115##                                                               
and                                                                       
 ##STR116##                                                               
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-1)                                              
 ##STR117##                                                               
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-2)                                              
 ##STR118##                                                               
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-3)                                              
 ##STR119##                                                               
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-4)                                              
 ##STR120##                                                               
Color mixing inhibitor (Cpd-5)                                            
 ##STR121##                                                               
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-6)                                              
2:4:4 (weight ratio) mixture of:                                          
 ##STR122##                                                               
 ##STR123##                                                               
 ##STR124##                                                               
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-7)                                              
 ##STR125##                                                               
(Average MW 60,000)                                                       
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-8)                                              
1:1 (weight ratio) mixture of:                                            
 ##STR126##                                                               
Dye image stabilizer (Cpd-9)                                              
 ##STR127##                                                               
Antiseptic agent (Cpd-10)                                                 
 ##STR128##                                                               
Antiseptic agent (Cpd-11)                                                 
 ##STR129##                                                               
Ultraviolet absorbent (UV-1)                                              
4:2:4 (weight ratio) mixture of:                                          
 ##STR130##                                                               
 ##STR131##                                                               
 ##STR132##                                                               
Solvent (Solv-1)                                                          
 ##STR133##                                                               
Solvent (Solv-2)                                                          
1:1 (by volume) mixture of:                                               
 ##STR134##                                                               
 ##STR135##                                                               
Solvent (Solv-3)                                                          
OP[OC.sub.9 H.sub.19 (iso)].sub.3                                         
Solvent (Solv-4)                                                          
 ##STR136##                                                               
Solvent (Solv-5)                                                          
 ##STR137##                                                               
Solvent (Solv-6)                                                          
80:20 (by volume) mixture of:                                             
 ##STR138##                                                               
 ##STR139##                                                               
Solvent (Solv-7)                                                          
 ##STR140##                                                               
Various processing solutions having the following compositions were       
prepared: Color Developer                                                 
______________________________________                                    
Water                     600    ml                                       
Ethylenediamine-N,N,N',N'-                                                
                          2.0    g                                        
tetramethylenephosphonic acid                                             
Potassium bromide         0.015  g                                        
Potassium chloride        3.1    g                                        
Triethanolamine           10.0   g                                        
Potassium carbonate       27     g                                        
Fluorescent brightening agent                                             
                          1.0    g                                        
(WHITEX.4B, available from Sumitomo                                       
Chemical Co., Ltd.)                                                       
Diethylhydroxylamine      4.2    g                                        
N-ethyl-N-(β-methanesulfonamido-                                     
                          5.0    g                                        
ethyl)-3-methyl-4-aminoaniline sulfate                                    
Water to make             1,000  ml                                       
pH (25° C.)        10.05                                           
______________________________________
Blix Solution 
______________________________________                                    
Water                    400    ml                                        
Ammonium thiosulfate (70%)                                                
                         100    ml                                        
Sodium sufite            17     g                                         
Iron chloride            0.30   mol                                       
Chelate compound as set forth in                                          
                         0.33   mol                                       
Table 7                                                                   
Ammonium bromide         40     g                                         
Water to make            1,000  ml                                        
pH (25° C.)       6.8                                              
______________________________________
Rinse Solution
Ion-exchanged water (calcium and magnesium concentrations: 3 ppm each)
The above mentioned light-sensitive material specimens were processed in the following manner:
______________________________________                                    
Processing step  Temperature                                              
                            Time                                          
______________________________________                                    
Color development                                                         
                 38° C.                                            
                            45 sec.                                       
Blix             35° C.                                            
                            25 sec.                                       
Rinse 1          35° C.                                            
                            20 sec.                                       
Rinse 2          35° C.                                            
                            20 sec.                                       
Rinse 3          35° C.                                            
                            20 sec.                                       
Drying           80° C.                                            
                            60 sec.                                       
______________________________________
Another batch of these specimens were uniformly exposed to light in such a manner that the grey density thus developed reached 1.5, processed in the same manner as described above, and then measured for the amount of silver remaining in the maximum density portion thereon by a fluorescent X-ray process. The results are set forth in Table 7.
              TABLE 7                                                     
______________________________________                                    
                    Remaining amount                                      
                    of silver                                             
No.  Chelate compound                                                     
                    (μg/cm.sup.2)                                      
                                  Remarks                                 
______________________________________                                    
701  Comparative    23.3          Comparative                             
     Compound A*                                                          
702  Present Compound 51                                                  
                    2.1           Invention                               
703  Present Compound 52                                                  
                    2.1           "                                       
704  Present Compound 54                                                  
                    2.3           "                                       
705  Present Compound 56                                                  
                    2.4           "                                       
706  Present Compound 61                                                  
                    2.0           "                                       
707  Present Compound 67                                                  
                    2.6           "                                       
708  Present Compound 77                                                  
                    2.8           "                                       
709  Present Compound 81                                                  
                    3.0           "                                       
______________________________________
Comparative Compound A* is the same as Comparative Compound A in Example 5.
The results show that the use of the present compounds enables the reduction in the remaining amount of silver as compared to Comparative Compound A.
EXAMPLE 8
Fuji Color SUPER HG400 (Production No. 311130) and Fuji Color REALA (Production No. 861016) were processed in the same manner as in Specimens 601 to 618 in Example 6. As a result, results similar to that of Example 6 were confirmed.
EXAMPLE 9
A multilayer color light-sensitive material was prepared as Specimen 902 by coating on a undercoated cellulose triacetate film support various layers having the following compositions.
Composition of Photographic Layer
The coated amount of silver halide and colloidal silver is represented in g/m2 as calculated in terms of amount of silver. The coated amount of coupler, additive and gelatin is represented in g/m2. The coated amount of sensitizing dye is represented in mol per mol of silver halide contained in the same layer. The symbols indicating additives have the following meanings. The additives having a plurality of effects are represented by the symbol indicating one of the effects.
UV: ultraviolet absorbent; Solv: high boiling organic solvent; ExF: dye; ExS: sensitizing dye; ExC: cyan coupler; ExM: magenta coupler; ExY: yellow coupler; Cpd: additive
______________________________________                                    
1st Layer: anti-halation layer                                            
Black colloidal silver   0.15                                             
Gelatin                  2.33                                             
ExM-2                    0.11                                             
UV-1                     3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
UV-2                     6.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
UV-3                     7.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.16                                             
Solv-2                   0.10                                             
ExF-1                    1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExF-2                    4.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExF-3                    5.0 × 10.sup.-3                            
Cpd-6                    1.0 × 10.sup.-3                            
2nd Layer: low sensitivity                                                
red-sensitive emulsion layer                                              
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.35                                             
(AgI content: 4.0 mol %; uniform AgI                                      
type; grain diameter: 0.4 μm (as                                       
calculated in terms of sphere);                                           
grain diameter fluctuation coefficient:                                   
30% (as calculated in terms of sphere);                                   
tabular grain; diameter/thickness: 3.0);                                  
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.18                                             
(AgI content: 6.0 mol %; internal high                                    
AgI type with core/shell ratio of 1:2;                                    
grain diameter: 0.45 μm (as calculated                                 
in terms of sphere); grain diameter                                       
fluctuation coefficient: 23% (as                                          
calculated in terms of sphere); tabular                                   
grain; diameter/thickness: 2.0);                                          
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                  0.77                                             
ExS-1                    2.4 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-2                    1.4 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-5                    2.3 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-7                    4.1 × 10.sup.-6                            
ExC-1                    0.09                                             
ExC-2                    4.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-3                    8.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-5                    0.08                                             
3rd layer: middle sensitivity red-sensitive                               
emulsion layer                                                            
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.80                                             
(AgI content: 6.0 mol %; internal high                                    
AgI type with core/shell ratio of 1:2;                                    
grain diameter: 0.65 μm (as calculated                                 
in terms of sphere); grain diameter                                       
fluctuation coefficient: 23% (as calculated                               
in terms of sphere); tabular grain;                                       
diameter/thickness: 2.0);                                                 
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                  1.46                                             
ExS-1                    2.4 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-2                    1.4 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-5                    2.4 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-7                    4.3 × 10.sup.-6                            
ExC-1                    0.19                                             
ExC-2                    2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-3                    0.10                                             
ExC-5                    0.19                                             
ExC-6                    2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExM-3                    2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
UV-2                     5.7 × 10.sup.-2                            
UV-3                     5.7 × 10.sup.-2                            
4th Layer: high sensitivity                                               
red-sensitive emulsion layer                                              
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         1.49                                             
(AgI content: 9.3 mol %; polystructural                                   
grain with core/shell ratio of 3:4:2;                                     
AgI content: 24, 0, 6 mol % towards                                       
surface; grain diameter: 0.75 μm (as                                   
calculated in terms of sphere);                                           
grain diameter fluctuation coefficient:                                   
23% (as calculated in terms of sphere);                                   
tabular grain; diameter/thickness: 2.5);                                  
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                  1.38                                             
ExS-1                    2.0 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-2                    1.1 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-5                    1.9 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-7                    1.4 × 10.sup.-5                            
ExC-1                    8.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-4                    9.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-6                    2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.20                                             
Solv-2                   0.53                                             
5th Layer: interlayer                                                     
Gelatin                  0.62                                             
Cpd-1                    0.13                                             
Polyethyl acrylate latex 8.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   8.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
6th Layer: low sensitivity                                                
green-sensitive emulsion layer                                            
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.19                                             
(AgI content: 4.0 mol %; uniform AgI                                      
type; grain diameter: 0.33 μm (as                                      
calculated in terms of sphere);                                           
grain diameter fluctuation coefficient:                                   
37% (as calculated in terms of sphere);                                   
tabular grain; diameter/thickness                                         
ratio: 2.0); (coated silver amount)                                       
Gelatin                  0.44                                             
ExS-3                    1.5 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-4                    4.4 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-5                    9.2 × 10.sup.-5                            
ExM-1                    0.17                                             
ExM-3                    3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.13                                             
Solv-4                   1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
7th Layer: middle sensitivity                                             
green-sensitive emulsion layer                                            
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.24                                             
(AgI content: 4.0 mol %; uniform AgI                                      
type; grain diameter: 0.55 μm (as                                      
calculated in terms of sphere);                                           
grain diameter fluctuation coefficient:                                   
15% (as calcualted in terms of sphere);                                   
tabular grain; diameter/thickness                                         
ratio: 4.0); (coated silver amount)                                       
Gelatin                  0.54                                             
ExS-3                    2.1 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-4                    6.3 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-5                    1.3 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExM-1                    0.15                                             
ExM-3                    4.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExY-1                    3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.13                                             
Solv-4                   1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
8th Layer: high sensitivity                                               
green-sensitive emulsion layer                                            
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.49                                             
(AgI content: 8.8 mol %; polystructural                                   
grain with ratio of amount of silver of                                   
3:4:2; AgI content: 24, 0, 3 mol %                                        
towards surface; grain diameter:                                          
0.75 μm (as calculated in terms of                                     
sphere); grain diameter fluctuation                                       
coefficient: 23% (as calculated in                                        
terms of sphere); diameter/thickness                                      
ratio: 1.6); (coated silver amount)                                       
Gelatin                  0.61                                             
ExS-4                    4.3 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExS-5                    8.6 × 10.sup.-5                            
ExS-8                    2.8 × 10.sup.-5                            
ExM-1                    8.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExM-2                    3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExY-1                    3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-1                    1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-4                    1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.23                                             
Solv-2                   5.0 × 10.sup. -2                           
Solv-4                   1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Cpd-8                    1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
9th Layer: interlayer                                                     
Gelatin                  0.56                                             
Cpd-1                    4.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Polyethyl acrylate latex 5.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
V-4                      3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
UV-5                     4.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
10th Layer: donor layer having                                            
interimage effect on red-sensitive layer                                  
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.67                                             
(AgI content: 8.0 mol %; internal high                                    
AgI type with core/shell ratio 1:2;                                       
grain diameter: 0.65 μm (as calculated                                 
in terms of sphere); grain diameter                                       
fluctuation coefficient: 25% (as                                          
calculated in terms of sphere);                                           
tabular grain; diameter/thickness                                         
ratio: 2.0); (coated silver amount)                                       
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.20                                             
(AgI content: 4.0 mol %; uniform                                          
AgI type; grain diameter: 0.4 μm (as                                   
calculated in terms of sphere);                                           
grain diameter fluctuation coefficient:                                   
30% (as calculated in terms of sphere);                                   
tabular grain; diameter/thickness: 3.0);                                  
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                  0.87                                             
ExS-3                    6.7 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExM-4                    0.16                                             
Solv-1                   0.30                                             
Solv-6                   3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
11th Layer: yellow filter layer                                           
Yellow colloidal silver  9.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Gelatin                  0.84                                             
Cpd-2                    0.13                                             
Solv-1                   0.13                                             
Cpd-1                    8.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Cpd-6                    2.0 × 10.sup.-3                            
H-1                      0.25                                             
12th Layer: low sensitivity                                               
blue-sensitive emulsion layer                                             
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.50                                             
(AgI content: 4.5 mol %; uniform AgI                                      
type; grain diameter: 0.7 μm (as                                       
calculated in terms of sphere);                                           
grain diameter fluctuation coefficient:                                   
15% (as calculated in terms of sphere);                                   
tabular grain; diameter/thickness: 7.0);                                  
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.30                                             
(AgI content: 3.0 mol %; uniform AgI                                      
type; grain diameter: 0.3 μm (as                                       
calculated in terms of sphere);                                           
grain diameter fluctuation coefficient:                                   
30% (as calculated in terms of sphere);                                   
tabular grain; diameter/thickness: 7.0);                                  
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                  2.18                                             
ExS-6                    9.0 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExC-1                    0.14                                             
ExY-2                    0.17                                             
ExY-3                    1.09                                             
Solv-1                   0.54                                             
13th Layer: interlayer                                                    
Gelatin                  0.40                                             
ExY-4                    0.19                                             
Solv-1                   0.19                                             
14th Layer: 1st protective layer                                          
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.40                                             
(AgI content: 10.0 mol %; internal                                        
high AgI type; grain diameter: 1.0 μm                                  
(as calculated in terms of sphere);                                       
grain diameter fluctuation coefficient:                                   
25% (as calculated in terms of sphere);                                   
polytwinning tabular grain;                                               
diameter/thickness ratio: 2.0);                                           
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                  0.49                                             
ExS-6                    2.6 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExY-2                    1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExY-3                    0.20                                             
ExC-1                    1 × 10.sup.-2                              
Solv-1                   9.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
15th Layer: 1st protective layer                                          
Emulsion of finely divided silver                                         
                         0.12                                             
bromoiodide grains (AgI content:                                          
2.0 mol %; uniform AgI type; grain                                        
diameter: 0.07 μm (as calculated in                                    
terms of sphere)); (coated silver amount)                                 
Gelatin                  0.63                                             
UV-4                     0.11                                             
UV-5                     0.18                                             
Solv-5                   2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Cpd-5                    0.10                                             
Polyethyl acrylate latex 9.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
16th layer: 2nd protective layer                                          
Emulsion of finely divided silver                                         
                         0.36                                             
bromoiodide grains (AgI content:                                          
0.2 mol %; uniform AgI type; grain                                        
diameter: 0.07 μm (as calculated in                                    
terms of sphere)); (coated silver amount)                                 
Gelatin                  0.85                                             
B-1 (diameter: 1.5 μm)                                                 
                         8.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
B-2 (diameter: 1.5 μm)                                                 
                         8.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
B-3                      2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
W-4                      2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
H-1                      0.18                                             
______________________________________
In addition to the above mentioned components, 1,2-benzisothiazoline-3-one, n-butyl-p-hydroxybenzoate, and 2-phenoxyethanol were incorporated in the specimen in amounts of 200 ppm on the average, about 1,000 ppm and about 10,000 ppm based on gelatin, respectively. The specimen further comprised B-4, B-5, F-1, F-2, F-3, F-4, F-5, F-6, F-7, F-8, F-9, F-10, F-11, F-12, and iron salts, lead salts, gold salts, platinum salts, iridium salts, and rhodium salts.
In addition to the above mentioned components, surface active agents W-1, W-2, and W-3 were added to each of these layers as coating aid or emulsion dispersant.
The structural formula of the compounds incorporated in these layers will be set forth below: ##STR141##
The specimen thus prepared was cut into 35-m wide strips, worked, wedgewise exposed to white light (color temperature of light source: 4,800° K.), and then processed by means of a processing machine for motion picture in the following process. For the evaluation of properties, another batch of the specimen imagewise exposed to light was processed using the developer until the accumulated replenishment of color developer reached three times the capacity of the mother liquid tank.
The composition of the bleaching solution used in the processing step were as set forth in Table 5. For the aeration of the bleaching solution, the bleaching bath was provided at the bottom thereof with a pipe having a large number of 0.2-mmφ pores through which air was blown at a rate of 200 ml/minute.
______________________________________                                    
Processing step                                                           
                         Temper-                                          
                                Replenish-                                
                                        Tank                              
Step     Time            ature  ment rate*                                
                                        capacity                          
______________________________________                                    
Color    3 min. 15 sec.  37.8° C.                                  
                                23 ml   10 l                              
development                                                               
Bleach   25 sec.         38.0° C.                                  
                                 5 ml   5 l                               
Fixing   1 min. 40 sec.  38.0° C.                                  
                                30 ml   10 l                              
Washing (1)                                                               
         30 sec.         38.0° C.                                  
                                --      5 l                               
Washing (2)                                                               
         20 sec.         38.0° C.                                  
                                30 ml   5 l                               
Stabilization                                                             
         20 sec.         38.0° C.                                  
                                20 ml   5 l                               
Drying   1 min.          55° C.                                    
______________________________________                                    
 *Determined per 35mm width and 1m length
The washing step was effected in a countercurrent process wherein the washing water flows from (2) to (1). The amount of the developer brought over to the bleaching step, and the amount of the fixing solution brought over to the washing step were each 2.0 ml per m of 35-mm wide light-sensitive material.
The time for crossover was 5 seconds in all the steps. This crossover time is included in the processing time at the previous step.
The various processing solutions had the following compositions:
Color Developer 
______________________________________                                    
                  Mother                                                  
                  solution                                                
                          Replenisher                                     
______________________________________                                    
Diethylenetriamine- 1.0 g     1.1 g                                       
pentaacetic acid                                                          
1-Hydroxyethylidene-                                                      
                    3.0 g     3.2 g                                       
1,1-diphosphonic acid                                                     
Sodium sulfite      4.0 g     4.9 g                                       
Potassium carbonate 30.0 g    30.0 g                                      
Potassium bromide   1.4 g     --                                          
Potassium iodide    1.5 mg    --                                          
Hydroxylamine sulfate                                                     
                    2.4 g     3.6 g                                       
4-(N-ethyl-N-β-hydroxyethyl-                                         
                    4.5 g     6.4 g                                       
amino)-2-methylaniline sulfate                                            
Water to make       1.0 l     1.0 l                                       
pH                  10.05     10.10                                       
______________________________________
Bleaching Solution 
______________________________________                                    
               Mother                                                     
               solution  Replenisher                                      
______________________________________                                    
Iron nitrate     0.20   mol      0.30 mol                                 
Chelate compound as                                                       
                 0.31   mol      0.47 mol                                 
set forth in Table 8                                                      
Ammonium bromide 100    g        150  g                                   
Ammonium nitrate 20     g        30   g                                   
Acetic acid      0.72   mol      1.09 mol                                 
Water to make    1.0    l        1.0  l                                   
pH               4.0             3.8                                      
______________________________________
The chelating compound used is a compound constituting a ferric chelating compound with a metal salt, which is used as the bleaching agent.
Fixing Solution 
______________________________________                                    
                Mother                                                    
                solution                                                  
                       Replenisher                                        
______________________________________                                    
Diammonium ethylenediamine-                                               
                  1.7    g     Same as left                               
tetraacetate                                                              
Ammonium sulfite  14.0   g     "                                          
Aqueous solution of                                                       
                  260.0  ml    "                                          
ammonium thiosulfate                                                      
(700 g/l)                                                                 
Water to make     1.0    l     "                                          
pH                7.0          "                                          
______________________________________
Washing Solution (The Mother Solution Was Used Also As Replenisher)
Tap water was passed through a mixed bed column packed with an H-type strongly acidic cation exchange resin (Amberlite IR-120B available from Rohm & Haas) and an OH-type strongly basic anion exchange resin (Amberlite IRA-400 available from the same company) so that the calcium and magnesium ion concentrations were each reduced to 3 mg/l or less. Dichlorinated sodium isocyanurate and sodium sulfate were then added to the solution in amounts of 20 mg/l and 150 mg/l, respectively.
The washing solution thus obtained had a pH value of 6.5 to 7.5.
Stabilizing Solution
(The mother solution was used also as replenisher)
______________________________________                                    
Formalin (37%)          1.2 mg                                            
Surface active agent    0.4 g                                             
[C.sub.10 H.sub.21(OCH.sub.2 CH.sub.2 O) .sub.10H]                        
Ethylene glycol         1.0 g                                             
Water to make           1.0 l                                             
pH                      5.0-7.0                                           
______________________________________
The photographic light-sensitive material specimens thus processed were then measured for the remaining amount of silver on the maximum color density portion by means of a fluorescent X-ray analyzer. The results are set forth in Table 8.
These photographic light-sensitive material specimens were also measured for density. Color density values DR measured by red light on the maximum color density portion were read from the characteristic curve.
Another batch of these specimens were processed in the same manner as mentioned above except that the following reference bleaching solution causing no malrecovery to original color was used in stead of the above mentioned bleaching solution and bleach was effected at a temperature of 38° C. at a replenishment rate of 25 ml/35 mm width and 1 m length for 600 seconds.
Reference Bleaching Solution 
______________________________________                                    
                  Mother                                                  
                  Solution                                                
                          Replenisher                                     
______________________________________                                    
Ferric sodium ethylenediamine-                                            
                    100.0  g      120.0                                   
                                       g                                  
tetraacetate trihydrate                                                   
Disodium ethylenediamine-                                                 
                    10.0   g      11.0 g                                  
tetraacetate                                                              
Ammonium bromide    140    g      140  g                                  
Ammonium nitrate    30.0   g      35.0 g                                  
27% Aqueous ammonia 6.5    ml     4.0  ml                                 
Water to make       1.0    l      1.0  l                                  
pH                  6.0           5.7                                     
______________________________________
The specimens thus processed were measured for density in the same manner as described above. DR values were read from the characteristic curve.
The difference (ΔDR) in DR of the specimens from that obtained by the reference bleaching solution were determined. DR value of the specimens, obtained by the reference bleaching solution was 2.1. ##EQU2##
The results are set forth in Table 8.
These specimens were also measured for change in gradation during the storage after processing. For this measurement, these specimens were stored under a wet heat condition (60° C., 70% RH) in a dark place for 4 weeks. The term "gradation (γG)" as used herein means the "difference between the color density (DG1) measured by green light on the portion which has been exposed by one tenth of the exposure that gives the maximum color density measured by green light and the color density (DG2) measured by green light on the portion which has been exposed by one thousandth of the exposure that gives the maximum color density measured by green light on the characteristic curve.
Gradation=D.sub.G1 -D.sub.G2
Change in gradation (Δγ.sub.G)=(γ.sub.G after storage)-(γ.sub.G before storage)
The results are set forth in Table 8.
              TABLE 8                                                     
______________________________________                                    
                 Remaining                                                
                 amount of  Malrecovery                                   
                                     Increase                             
                 silver     to original                                   
                                     in grada-                            
No.   Compound   [μg/cm.sup.2 ]                                        
                            (ΔD.sub.R)                              
                                     tion (Δγ.sub.G)          
______________________________________                                    
801   Comparative                                                         
                 60.5       0.10     0.15                                 
      Compound A                                                          
802   Comparative                                                         
                 13.8       0.27     0.30                                 
      Compound B                                                          
803   Comparative                                                         
                 30.0       0.41     0.15                                 
      Compound C                                                          
804   Present     9.8       0.10     0.06                                 
      Compound 51                                                         
805   Present    12.1       0.11     0.04                                 
      Compound 53                                                         
806   Present     9.5       0.08     0.03                                 
      Compound 73                                                         
807   Present    10.8       0.05     0.04                                 
      Compound 85                                                         
______________________________________
Comparative Compounds A, B and C are the same as those used in Example 5.
The results set forth in Table 8 show that as compared to the comparative compounds the present compounds are capable of reducing the remaining amount of silver while contributing to eliminating malrecovery to original color and gradation change during the storage of dye images after processing.
EXAMPLE 10
Specimen 102 as prepared in Example 9 was processed in the same manner as in Example 9 except that the bleaching time was altered. The specimen thus processed was then measured for malrecovery to original color in the same manner as in Example 9 except that the bleaching solution (mother solution) contained 0.72 mol of acetic acid. The results are set forth in Table 9.
              TABLE 9                                                     
______________________________________                                    
          Malrecovery to original color (ΔD.sub.R)                  
          Bleaching time (sec.)                                           
Compound    20       30       50     100                                  
______________________________________                                    
Comparative 0.30    0.25      0.10  0.03                                  
Compound B                                                                
Present     0.10    0.06      0.04  0.01                                  
Compound 73                                                               
______________________________________                                    
 (Note: Comparative Compound B is the same as that used in Example 9)
The results set forth in Table 9 show that the compound of the present invention exhibits an excellent effect of eliminating malrecovery to original color upon rapid bleach.
EXAMPLE 11
A multilayer color light-sensitive material was prepared as Specimen 103 by coating on a undercoated cellulose triacetate film support various layers having the following compositions.
Composition of Photographic Layer
The coated amount of silver halide and colloidal silver is represented in g/m2 as calculated in terms of amount of silver. The coated amount of coupler, additive and gelatin is represented in g/m2. The coated amount of sensitizing dye is represented in mol per mol of silver halide contained in the same layer.
______________________________________                                    
1st Layer: anti-halation layer                                            
Black colloidal silver:  0.20                                             
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                  2.20                                             
UV-1                     0.11                                             
UV-2                     0.20                                             
Cpd-1                    4.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Cpd-2                    1.9 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.30                                             
Solv-2                   1.2 × 10.sup.-2                            
2nd Layer: interlayer                                                     
Finely divided silver bromide                                             
                         0.15                                             
grains (AgI content: 1.0 mol %;                                           
diameter: 0.07 μm as calculated                                        
in terms of sphere):(coated                                               
silver amount)                                                            
Gelatin                  1.00                                             
ExC-4                    6.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Cpd-3                    2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
3rd Layer: 1st red-sensitive emulsion layer                               
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.42                                             
(AgI content: 5.0 mol %; high                                             
surface AgI type; diameter:                                               
0.9 μm (as calculated in terms                                         
of sphere); coefficient of                                                
fluctuation in grain diameter:                                            
21% (as calculated in terms of                                            
sphere); tabular grains; diameter/                                        
thickness ratio: 7.5):(coated                                             
silver amount)                                                            
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.40                                             
(AgI content: 4.0 mol %; high                                             
internal AgI type; diameter:                                              
0.4 μm (as calculated in terms                                         
of sphere); coefficient of                                                
fluctuation in grain diameter:                                            
18% (as calculated in terms of                                            
sphere); tetradecahedral grains):                                         
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                  1.90                                             
ExS-1                    4.5 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-2                    1.5 × 10.sup.-4  mol                       
ExS-3                    4.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExC-1                    0.65                                             
ExC-3                    1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-4                    2.3 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.32                                             
4th Layer: 2nd red-sensitive emulsion layer                               
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.85                                             
(AgI content: 8.5 mol %; high                                             
internal AgI type; diameter:                                              
1.0 μm (as calculated in terms                                         
of sphere); coefficient of                                                
fluctuation in grain diameter:                                            
25% (as calculated in terms of                                            
sphere); tabular grains; diameter/                                        
thickness ratio: 3.0):(coated                                             
silver amount)                                                            
Gelatin                  0.91                                             
ExS-1                    3.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-2                    1.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-3                    3.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExC-1                    0.13                                             
ExC-2                    6.2 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-4                    4.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-6                    3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.10                                             
5th Layer: 3rd red-sensitive emulsion layer                               
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         1.50                                             
(AgI content: 11.3 mol %; high                                            
internal AgI type; diameter:                                              
1.4 μm (as calculated in terms                                         
of sphere); coefficient of                                                
fluctuation in grain diameter:                                            
28% (as calculated in terms of                                            
sphere); tabular grains; diameter/                                        
thickness ratio: 6.0):(coated                                             
silver amount)                                                            
Gelatin                  1.20                                             
ExS-1                    2.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-2                    6.0 × 10.sup. -5 mol                       
ExS-3                    2.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExC-2                    8.5 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-5                    7.3 × 10.sup.-2                            
ExC-6                    1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.12                                             
Solv-2                   0.12                                             
6th Layer: interlayer                                                     
Gelatin                  1.00                                             
Cpd-4                    8.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   8.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
7th Layer: 1st green-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.28                                             
(AgI content: 5.0 mol %; high                                             
surface AgI type; diameter:                                               
0.9 μm (as calculated in terms                                         
of sphere); coefficient of                                                
fluctuation in grain diameter:                                            
21% (as calculated in terms of                                            
sphere); tabular grains; diameter/                                        
thickness ratio: 7.0):(coated                                             
silver amount)                                                            
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.16                                             
(AgI content: 4.0 mol %; high                                             
internal AgI type; diameter:                                              
0.4 μm (as calculated in terms                                         
of sphere); coefficient of                                                
fluctuation in grain diameter:                                            
18% (as calculated in terms of                                            
sphere); tetradecahedral grains):                                         
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                  1.20                                             
ExS-4                    5.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-5                    2.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-6                    1.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExM-1                    0.50                                             
ExM-2                    0.10                                             
ExM-5                    3.5 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.20                                             
Solv-3                   3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
 8th Layer: 2nd green-sensitive emulsion layer                            
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.57                                             
(AgI content: 8.5 mol %; high                                             
internal AgI type; diameter:                                              
1.0 μm (as calculated in terms                                         
of sphere); coefficient of                                                
fluctuation in grain diameter:                                            
25% (as calculated in terms of                                            
sphere); tabular grains; diameter/                                        
thickness ratio: 3.0):(coated                                             
silver amount)                                                            
Gelatin                  0.45                                             
ExS-4                    3.5 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-5                    1.4 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-6                    7.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExM-1                    0.12                                             
ExM-2                    7.1 × 10.sup.-3                            
ExM-3                    3.5 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.15                                             
Solv-3                   1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
9th Layer: interlayer                                                     
Gelatin                  0.50                                             
Solv-1                   2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
10th Layer: 3rd green-sensitive emulsion layer                            
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         1.30                                             
(AgI content: 11.3 mol %; high                                            
internal AgI type; diameter:                                              
1.4 μm (as calculated in terms                                         
of sphere); coefficient of                                                
fluctuation in grain diameter:                                            
28% (as calculated in terms of                                            
sphere); tabular grains; diameter/                                        
thickness ratio: 6.0):(coated                                             
silver amount)                                                            
Gelatin                  1.20                                             
ExS-4                    2.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExS-5                    8.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExS-6                    8.0 × 10.sup.-5 mol                        
ExM-4                    5.8 ×  10.sup.-2                           
ExM-6                    5.0 × 10.sup.-3                            
ExC-2                    4.5 × 10.sup.-3                            
Cpd-5                    1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-3                   0.25                                             
11th Layer: yellow filter layer                                           
Gelatin                  0.50                                             
Cpd-6                    5.2 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.12                                             
12th Layer: interlayer                                                    
Gelatin                  0.45                                             
Cpd-3                    0.10                                             
13th Layer: 1st blue-sensitive layer                                      
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.20                                             
(AgI content: 2 mol %; uniform                                            
AgI type; diameter: 0.55 μm                                            
(as calculated in terms of sphere);                                       
coefficient of fluctuation in                                             
grain diameter: 25% (as calculated                                        
in terms of sphere); tabular grains;                                      
diameter/thickness ratio: 7.0):(coated                                    
silver amount)                                                            
Gelatin                  1.00                                             
ExS-7                    3.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExY-1                    0.60                                             
ExY-2                    2.3 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-1                   0.15                                             
14th Layer: 2nd blue-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         0.19                                             
(AgI content: 19.0 mol %; high                                            
internal AgI type; diameter:                                              
1.0 μm (as calculated in terms                                         
of sphere); coefficient of                                                
fluctuation in grain diameter:                                            
16% (as calculated in terms of                                            
sphere); octahedral grains):(coated                                       
silver amount)                                                            
Gelatin                  0.35                                             
ExS-7                    2.0 × 10.sup.-4 mol                        
ExY-1                    0.22                                             
Solv-1                   7.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
15th Layer: interlayer                                                    
Finely divided silver bromoiodide                                         
                         0.20                                             
(AgI content: 2 mol %; uniform AgI                                        
type; grain diameter: 0.13 μm as                                       
calculated in terms of sphere):(coated                                    
silver amount)                                                            
Gelatin                  0.36                                             
16th Layer: 3rd blue-sensitive emulsion layer                             
Silver bromoiodide emulsion                                               
                         1.55                                             
(AgI content: 14.0 mol %; high                                            
internal AgI type; grain diameter:                                        
1.7 μm as calculated in terms of                                       
sphere; coefficient of fluctuation                                        
in grain diameter: 28% as calculated                                      
in terms of sphere); tabular grains;                                      
diameter/thickness ratio: 5.0):(coated                                    
silver amount)                                                            
Gelatin                  1.00                                             
ExS-8                    1.5 × 10.sup.-4                            
ExY-1                    0.21                                             
Solv-1                   7.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
17th Layer: 1st protective layer                                          
Gelatin                  1.80                                             
UV-1                     0.13                                             
UV-2                     0.21                                             
Solv-1                   1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
Solv-2                   1.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
18th Layer: 2nd protective layer                                          
Finely divided silver chloride                                            
                         0.36                                             
grains (grain diameter: 0.07 μm                                        
as calculated in terms of sphere):                                        
(coated silver amount)                                                    
Gelatin                  0.70                                             
B-1 (diameter: 1.5 μm)                                                 
                         2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
B-2 (diameter: 1.5 μm)                                                 
                         0.15                                             
B-3                      3.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
W-1                      2.0 × 10.sup.-2                            
H-1                      0.35                                             
Cpd-7                    1.00                                             
______________________________________
In addition to the above mentioned components, 1,2-benzisothiazoline-3-one, n-butyl-p-hydroxybenzoate, and 2-phenoxyethanol were incorporated in the specimen in amounts of 200 ppm on the average, about 1,000 ppm and about 10,000 ppm based on gelatin, respectively. The specimen further comprised B-4, B-5, W-2, W-3, F-1, F-2, F-3, F-4, F-5, F-6, F-7, F-8, F-9, F-10, F-11, F-12, F-13, and iron salts, lead salts, gold salts, platinum salts, iridium salts, and rhodium salts. ##STR142##
The specimen thus prepared was worked, exposed, and then processed in the same manner as in Example 9 except that the composition of the bleaching solution was altered and the bleaching time was 40 seconds.
The composition of the bleaching solution used in the processing step were as follows:
Bleaching Solution 
______________________________________                                    
                 Mother                                                   
                 Solution                                                 
                         Replenisher                                      
______________________________________                                    
Ferric nitrate     0.20   mol    0.30  mol                                
Chelate compound 73                                                       
                   0.31   mol    0.47  mol                                
Ammonium bromide   100    g      150   g                                  
Ammonium nitrate   20     g      30    g                                  
Organic acid (as set forth                                                
                   0.10   mol/   0.14  mol/                               
in Table 10)       0.30   mol    0.42  mol                                
Water to make      1.0    l      1.0   l                                  
pH                 4.2           4.6                                      
______________________________________
These photographic light-sensitive material specimens thus processed were then measured for gradation change (ΔγG) in the same manner as in Example 9. The results are set forth in Table 10.
              TABLE 10                                                    
______________________________________                                    
Organic acid                                                              
                    Concentration                                         
                                Gradation change                          
Remarks Compound    (mol/l)     (Δγ.sub.G)                    
______________________________________                                    
Present Acetic acid 0.1         0.04                                      
Invention           0.3         0.03                                      
        Glycolic acid                                                     
                    0.1         0.03                                      
                    0.3         0.02                                      
        Lactic acid 0.1         0.06                                      
                    0.3         0.05                                      
        n-Butyric acid                                                    
                    0.1         0.07                                      
                    0.3         0.05                                      
        Malonic acid                                                      
                    0.1         0.08                                      
                    0.3         0.07                                      
        Malic acid  0.1         0.08                                      
                    0.3         0.06                                      
        Citric acid 0.1         0.08                                      
                    0.3         0.07                                      
        Aspartic acid                                                     
                    0.1         0.10                                      
                    0.3         0.09                                      
        Phthalic acid                                                     
                    0.1         0.10                                      
                    0.3         0.10                                      
______________________________________
The results set forth in Table 10 show that the use of the compounds of the present invention provides an excellent effect of eliminating the gradation change upon storage of dye images after processing.
EXAMPLE 12
Specimen 101 as prepared in the examples in JP-A-2-44345 was worked, exposed to light, and then processed in the same manner as in Example 9 except that the bleaching time was 30 seconds and the replenishment rate of the bleaching solution was altered to alter the ratio (C/R) of the amount of the developer to be brought over to the bleach step (C) to the replenishment rate of the bleaching solution (R) as set forth in Table 11. The composition of the processing solutions other than the bleaching solution were the same as that in Example 9.
The composition of the bleaching solution used in Example 12 was as follows:
Bleaching Solution 
______________________________________                                    
               Running                                                    
               Solution                                                   
                       Replenisher                                        
______________________________________                                    
Ferric nitrate   0.20   mol    0.30   mol                                 
Chelate compound as                                                       
                 0.31   mol    0.47   mol                                 
set forth in Table 7                                                      
Ammonium bromide 100    g      150    g                                   
Ammonium nitrate 20     g      30     g                                   
Glycolic acid    0.5    mol    0.75   mol                                 
Water to make    1.0    l      1.0    l                                   
pH               3.5           3.6                                        
______________________________________
These photographic light-sensitive material specimens thus processed were then measured for the remaining amount of silver in the same manner as in Example 5. The results are set forth in Table 11.
              TABLE 11                                                    
______________________________________                                    
           Remaining amount of silver (μg/cm.sup.2)                    
           C/R                                                            
Compound     0.1    0.2        0.4  0.6                                   
______________________________________                                    
Comparative  46.0   46.8       49.8 53.5                                  
Compound A                                                                
Comparative  9.7    9.9        11.3 14.2                                  
Compound B                                                                
Comparative  25.8   26.1       27.4 31.7                                  
Compound C                                                                
Present      8.2    8.3        8.3  8.5                                   
Compound 51                                                               
Present      9.1    9.2        9.1  9.8                                   
Compound 53                                                               
Present      7.5    7.5        7.6  8.0                                   
Compound 73                                                               
Present      8.3    8.5        8.4  8.5                                   
Compound 85                                                               
Present      8.9    9.4        9.8  10.0                                  
Compound 50                                                               
______________________________________
The results set forth in Table 7 show that as compared to the comparative compounds the use of the compounds of the present invention can also provide excellent desilvering properties in a processing step wherein the replenishment rate of the bleaching solution is reduced.
As mentioned above, the use of a composition having a bleaching capacity containing a metal chelate compound of the present invention enables a rapid processing with no bleach fogging, little subsequent stain and excellent desilvering properties.
Further, the use of a composition containing an organic acid enables a rapid processing with little malrecovery to original color, little subsequent gradation change and excellent desilvering properties.
While the invention has been described in detail and with reference to specific embodiments thereof, it will be apparent to one skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope thereof.

Claims (20)

What is claimed is:
1. A process for the processing of an imagewise exposed silver halide color photographic material, which comprises developing in a color developing solution, and then processing with a processing composition comprising at least one metal chelate compound formed of a salt of a metal selected from the group consisting of Fe(III), Mn(III), Co(III), Rh(II), Rh(III), Au(III), Au(II) and Ce(IV) and a compound represented by the general formula (I): ##STR143## wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, Ra, Rb, and Rc each represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group or an aromatic group; R5 and R6 each represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an acyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonyl group or a sulfinyl group, or R5 and R6 together may form a 5- or 6-membered ring; L1 represents a divalent aliphatic or aromatic group or a divalent linking group containing at least one of a divalent aliphatic group and a divalent aromatic group; A1 represents a carboxyl group, a phosphono group, a sulfo group, a hydroxyl group, or a substituted group thereof (acidic group only) with an alkali metal atom; and t and u each represents an integer 0 or 1; provided that when R5 and R6 together form a 5- or 6-membered ring, R1, R2, R3 and R4 each does not represent an aromatic ring, and when R5 and R6 together form a benzene ring, at least one of t and u represents 1.
2. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 1, wherein at least one of t and u is 1 in the general formula (I).
3. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 1, wherein t and u each represents 1 in the general formula (I).
4. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 1, wherein said compound represented by formula (I) is a compound represented by the general formula (II): ##STR144## wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, Rb, Rc, A1, L1, t and u are as defined in the general formula (I); L2 has the same meaning as L1 in the general formula (I); A2 has the same meaaning as A1 in the general formula (I), and R5 ' and R6 ' has the same meaning as R5 and R6 with the proviso that R5 ' and R6 ' are not connected to each other to form a ring.
5. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 4, wherein said compound represented by formula (III) is a compound represented by the general formula (III): ##STR145## wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 ', R6 ', A1, A2, L1, L2, t and u are as defined in the general formula (II); L3 and L4 each has the same meaning as L1 in the general formula (I); and A3 and A4 each has the same meaaning as A1 in the general formula (I).
6. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 1, wherein said compound represented by formula (I) is a compound represented by the general formula (IV): ##STR146## wherein Z represents a nonmetallic atom group which forms a 5- or 6-membered ring; A1, L1, Ra, Rb, Rc, t and u each has the same meaning as those of general formula (I); R11, R12, R13, and R14 each represents a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group, provided that when the ring formed by Z is a benzene ring, at least one of t and u is 1.
7. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 6, wherein R11, R12, R13 and R14 each represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, Ra, Rb and Rc each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and L1 represents an alkylene group, an arylene group or a divalent linking group containing at least one of an alkylene group and an arylene group.
8. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 6, wherein said 5- or 6-membered ring formed by Z is an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring or an cyclic alkene ring.
9. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 6, wherein said 5- or 6-membered ring formed by Z is a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyridazine ring, a quinoline ring, and quinoxaline ring.
10. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 6, wherein said 5- or 6-membered ring formed by Z is a benzene ring.
11. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 1, wherein L1 is a group represented by the general formula (L1): ##STR147## wherein La and Lb each represents an alkylene group, an aralkylene group or an arylene group; and A represents --O--, --S--, ##STR148## (in which R01 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or hydroxyl group), --SO2 -- or a group formed of a combination thereof; m and n each represents an integer of 0 or 1; and the symbol * indicates the position at which L1 is connected to A1.
12. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 11, wherein m and n are 0.
13. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 11, wherein L1 is a methylene group or an ethylene group.
14. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 6, wherein the compound represented by the general formula (IV) is a compound represented by the general formula (V): ##STR149## wherein Z, A1, L1, R11, R12, R13, R14, Rb, Rc, t, and u are as defined in the general formula (IV); L2 has the same meaning as L1 in the general formula (IV); and A2 has the same meaning as A1 in the general formula (IV).
15. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 14, wherein the compound represented by the general formula (V) is a compound represented by the general formula (VI): ##STR150## wherein Z, A1, L1, R11, R12, R13, R14, t, and u are as defined in the general formula (IV); L2, L3 and L4 each has the same meaning as L1 in the general formula (IV); and A2, A3 and A4 has the same meaning as A1 in the general formula (IV).
16. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 1, wherein the amount of said metal chelate compound is 0.05 to 1 mol/l of the processing composition.
17. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 1, said processing composition further comprising an organic acid.
18. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claimd 1, wherein said silver halide color photographic material comprises a silver halide emulsion containing silver iodide in an amount of 0.1 to 30 mol % and the processing is effected with said processing composition from 10 to 40 seconds.
19. A process for the processing of a silver halide color photographic material as in claim 1, wherein said silver halide color photographic material comprises a silver halide emulsion containing silver chloride or silver bromochloride and the processing is effected with said processing composition from 5 to 30 seconds.
20. A method for processing a silver halide color photographic material comprising an imagewise exposed silver halide color photographic material comprising a support having thereon at least one silver halide emulsion layer with a color developing solution and thereafter processing said material with a processing solution having a bleaching capacity which contains at least a bleaching agent, wherein the bleaching agent is a metal chelate compound formed of a salt of a metal selected from the group consisting of Fe(III), Mn(III), Co(III), Rh(II), Rh(III), Au(III), Au(II) and Ce(IV) and a compound represented by the general formula (I): ##STR151## wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, Ra, Rb, and Rc each represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group or an aromatic group; R5 and R6 each represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an acyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonyl group or a sulfinyl group, or R5 and R6 together may form a 5- or 6-membered ring; L1 represents a divalent aliphatic or aromatic group or a divalent linking group containing at least one of a divalent aliphatic group and a divalent aromatic group; A1 represents a carboxyl group, a phosphono group, a sulfo group, a hydroxyl group, or a substituted group thereof (acidic group only) with an alkali metal atom; and t and u each represents an integer 0 or 1; provided that when R5 and R6 together form a 5- or 6-membered ring, R1, R2, R3 and R4 each does not represent an aromatic ring, and when R5 and R6 together form a benzene ring, at least one of t and u represents 1.
US07/715,282 1990-06-15 1991-06-14 Composition and process for the processing of silver halide color photographic material Expired - Lifetime US5188927A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP15668390 1990-06-15
JP2-156683 1990-06-15
JP2-258539 1990-09-27
JP25853990A JPH04134450A (en) 1990-09-27 1990-09-27 Processing composition for silver halide color photographic sensitive material and processing method
JP2-330776 1990-11-30
JP33077690A JP2670902B2 (en) 1990-06-15 1990-11-30 Processing composition and processing method for silver halide color photographic light-sensitive material

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US5188927A true US5188927A (en) 1993-02-23

Family

ID=27321031

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US07/715,282 Expired - Lifetime US5188927A (en) 1990-06-15 1991-06-14 Composition and process for the processing of silver halide color photographic material

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (1) US5188927A (en)
EP (1) EP0461670B1 (en)
DE (1) DE69129166T2 (en)

Cited By (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5278036A (en) * 1991-09-24 1994-01-11 Konica Corporation Photographic developer composition
US5298370A (en) * 1991-05-14 1994-03-29 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Method of processing silver halide color photographic material and photographic bleach-fixing composition
US5316898A (en) * 1992-02-25 1994-05-31 Konica Corporation Solid bleacher for silver halide color photographic light sensitive material and the processing method thereof
US5350668A (en) * 1992-04-28 1994-09-27 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Method for processing silver halide color photographic material containing tabular silver iodobromide grains using a processing solution having a bleaching ability containing an iron (III) complex salt
US5352567A (en) * 1990-01-22 1994-10-04 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Method for processing silver halide color photographic material using composition having a bleaching ability
US5409804A (en) * 1991-09-05 1995-04-25 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Photographic processing composition and processing method
US5447821A (en) * 1992-01-16 1995-09-05 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Reducer and reduction method for silver images
US5656416A (en) * 1994-12-22 1997-08-12 Eastman Kodak Company Photographic processing composition and method using organic catalyst for peroxide bleaching agent
US7034172B1 (en) 2005-06-07 2006-04-25 Basf Corporation Ferric and acid complex
US10517849B2 (en) 2016-10-26 2019-12-31 Constellation Pharmaceuticals, Inc. LSD1 inhibitors and medical uses thereof
US10526287B2 (en) 2015-04-23 2020-01-07 Constellation Pharmaceuticals, Inc. LSD1 inhibitors and uses thereof

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3615508A (en) * 1969-11-03 1971-10-26 Eastman Kodak Co Photographic blixes and blixing
US3870520A (en) * 1972-10-05 1975-03-11 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photographic processing composition
US3928040A (en) * 1973-07-07 1975-12-23 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd The use of a polyvalent cation-organic phosphonic acid complex as a bleaching agent
DE2554861A1 (en) * 1974-12-05 1976-06-16 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Processing silver halide colour material - using bleach bath contg iron (III) aminopoly-carboxylic acid complex, bromide and persulphate
US4268618A (en) * 1979-07-05 1981-05-19 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Bleaching composition for photographic processing
EP0071402A1 (en) * 1981-07-21 1983-02-09 Konica Corporation A method of stabilizing a light-sensitive silver halide color photographic material
EP0196091A2 (en) * 1985-03-29 1986-10-01 Konica Corporation Method of processing light-sensitive silver halide color photographic material
GB2186987A (en) * 1986-02-19 1987-08-26 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Silver halide color image forming process
US4818673A (en) * 1986-08-05 1989-04-04 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Method for processing a silver halide color photographic material
EP0329003A2 (en) * 1988-02-15 1989-08-23 Konica Corporation Method of forming color photographic images
US5063140A (en) * 1988-02-15 1991-11-05 Konica Corporation Method for processing silver halide color photographic light-sensitive materials

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE69127130T2 (en) * 1990-05-09 1997-12-11 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photographic processing composition and processing method using the same
JP2670903B2 (en) * 1990-05-17 1997-10-29 富士写真フイルム株式会社 Silver halide color photographic light-sensitive material processing composition and processing method

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3615508A (en) * 1969-11-03 1971-10-26 Eastman Kodak Co Photographic blixes and blixing
US3870520A (en) * 1972-10-05 1975-03-11 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photographic processing composition
US3928040A (en) * 1973-07-07 1975-12-23 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd The use of a polyvalent cation-organic phosphonic acid complex as a bleaching agent
DE2554861A1 (en) * 1974-12-05 1976-06-16 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Processing silver halide colour material - using bleach bath contg iron (III) aminopoly-carboxylic acid complex, bromide and persulphate
US4268618A (en) * 1979-07-05 1981-05-19 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Bleaching composition for photographic processing
EP0071402A1 (en) * 1981-07-21 1983-02-09 Konica Corporation A method of stabilizing a light-sensitive silver halide color photographic material
EP0196091A2 (en) * 1985-03-29 1986-10-01 Konica Corporation Method of processing light-sensitive silver halide color photographic material
GB2186987A (en) * 1986-02-19 1987-08-26 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Silver halide color image forming process
US4818673A (en) * 1986-08-05 1989-04-04 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Method for processing a silver halide color photographic material
EP0329003A2 (en) * 1988-02-15 1989-08-23 Konica Corporation Method of forming color photographic images
US5063140A (en) * 1988-02-15 1991-11-05 Konica Corporation Method for processing silver halide color photographic light-sensitive materials

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Grant Haist: "Modern Photographic Processing", vol. 2, 1979, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., N.Y. USA pp. 576-587.
Grant Haist: Modern Photographic Processing , vol. 2, 1979, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., N.Y. USA pp. 576 587. *

Cited By (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5352567A (en) * 1990-01-22 1994-10-04 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Method for processing silver halide color photographic material using composition having a bleaching ability
US5298370A (en) * 1991-05-14 1994-03-29 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Method of processing silver halide color photographic material and photographic bleach-fixing composition
US5409804A (en) * 1991-09-05 1995-04-25 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Photographic processing composition and processing method
US5278036A (en) * 1991-09-24 1994-01-11 Konica Corporation Photographic developer composition
US5447821A (en) * 1992-01-16 1995-09-05 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Reducer and reduction method for silver images
US5316898A (en) * 1992-02-25 1994-05-31 Konica Corporation Solid bleacher for silver halide color photographic light sensitive material and the processing method thereof
US5350668A (en) * 1992-04-28 1994-09-27 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Method for processing silver halide color photographic material containing tabular silver iodobromide grains using a processing solution having a bleaching ability containing an iron (III) complex salt
US5656416A (en) * 1994-12-22 1997-08-12 Eastman Kodak Company Photographic processing composition and method using organic catalyst for peroxide bleaching agent
US5691122A (en) * 1994-12-22 1997-11-25 Eastman Kodak Company Photographic processing composition and method using organic catalyst for peroxide bleaching agent
US5776665A (en) * 1994-12-22 1998-07-07 Eastman Kodak Company Photographic processing composition and method using organic catalyst for peroxide bleaching agent
US7034172B1 (en) 2005-06-07 2006-04-25 Basf Corporation Ferric and acid complex
US10526287B2 (en) 2015-04-23 2020-01-07 Constellation Pharmaceuticals, Inc. LSD1 inhibitors and uses thereof
US10517849B2 (en) 2016-10-26 2019-12-31 Constellation Pharmaceuticals, Inc. LSD1 inhibitors and medical uses thereof
US11013718B2 (en) 2016-10-26 2021-05-25 Constellation Pharmaceuticals, Inc. LSD1 inhibitors and medical uses thereof
US11547695B2 (en) 2016-10-26 2023-01-10 Constellation Pharmaceuticals, Inc. LSD1 inhibitors and medical uses thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
DE69129166D1 (en) 1998-05-07
EP0461670B1 (en) 1998-04-01
EP0461670A1 (en) 1991-12-18
DE69129166T2 (en) 1998-07-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
USH953H (en) Method for processing silver halide color photographic material
US5250401A (en) Processing composition for silver halide color photographic material and processing process including that composition
US5188927A (en) Composition and process for the processing of silver halide color photographic material
US5223379A (en) Processing compositions for silver halide color photographic materials and method for processing the same materials
US5296339A (en) Method for processing silver halide color photographic material
US5409804A (en) Photographic processing composition and processing method
EP0720049B1 (en) Photographic processing composition and processing method using the same
US5093228A (en) Method for processing silver halide color photographic material
US5215872A (en) Method of processing a silver halide color photographic material
US5217855A (en) Processing composition for silver halide color photographic material and processing method
US5147765A (en) Process comprising bleaching, bleach-fix and fixing silver halide color photographic material
US5011763A (en) Method for processing a silver halide color photographic material
US5352567A (en) Method for processing silver halide color photographic material using composition having a bleaching ability
JP2654714B2 (en) Processing composition and processing method for silver halide color photographic light-sensitive material
US5538837A (en) Silver halide color photographic light-sensitive material
JP2701175B2 (en) Composition having bleaching ability for silver halide color photographic light-sensitive material and processing method using the same
JP2670902B2 (en) Processing composition and processing method for silver halide color photographic light-sensitive material
US5221597A (en) Method for processing silver halide color photographic materials
US5118595A (en) Method of processing silver halide color photographic material
EP0450554B1 (en) Process for processing a silver color photographic material
US5178993A (en) Method for processing silver halide color photographic material
JP2565726B2 (en) Silver halide color photographic light-sensitive material
US5254444A (en) Photographic processing composition and processing method using the same
US5256531A (en) Photographic processing composition and processing method using the same
EP0329051A2 (en) Method for processing silver halide color photographic materials

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD., JAPAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST.;ASSIGNORS:OKADA, HISASHI;SEKI, HIROYUKI;REEL/FRAME:005782/0925

Effective date: 19910722

STCF Information on status: patent grant

Free format text: PATENTED CASE

FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: PAYOR NUMBER ASSIGNED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: ASPN); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 4

FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: PAYOR NUMBER ASSIGNED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: ASPN); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 8

FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 12

AS Assignment

Owner name: FUJIFILM CORPORATION, JAPAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:FUJIFILM HOLDINGS CORPORATION (FORMERLY FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.);REEL/FRAME:018904/0001

Effective date: 20070130

Owner name: FUJIFILM CORPORATION,JAPAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:FUJIFILM HOLDINGS CORPORATION (FORMERLY FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.);REEL/FRAME:018904/0001

Effective date: 20070130